WO2021204128A1 - 一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021204128A1
WO2021204128A1 PCT/CN2021/085732 CN2021085732W WO2021204128A1 WO 2021204128 A1 WO2021204128 A1 WO 2021204128A1 CN 2021085732 W CN2021085732 W CN 2021085732W WO 2021204128 A1 WO2021204128 A1 WO 2021204128A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pssch
dmrs
time
overhead
frequency resource
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2021/085732
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
郭文婷
苏宏家
卢磊
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP21785577.4A priority Critical patent/EP4132171A4/en
Publication of WO2021204128A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021204128A1/zh
Priority to US17/961,386 priority patent/US12402104B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0044—Allocation of payload; Allocation of data channels, e.g. PDSCH or PUSCH
    • H04L5/0046—Determination of the number of bits transmitted on different sub-channels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0037—Inter-user or inter-terminal allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signalling for the administration of the divided path, e.g. signalling of configuration information
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453—Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/50—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources
    • H04W72/53—Allocation or scheduling criteria for wireless resources based on regulatory allocation policies
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal

Definitions

  • This application relates to the technical field of Internet of Vehicles, and in particular to a method and device for determining the size of a transmission block.
  • transport block size transport block size, TBS
  • RI resource elements
  • the current standard defines how to determine the number of REs used for air interface transmission.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • This application provides a method and device for determining the size of a transmission block, which can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as vehicle-to-everything (V2X) communication, workshop communication long-term evolution-vehicle (LTE-V), Vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication, etc., or can be used in intelligent driving, intelligent networked vehicles and other fields.
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • LTE-V workshop communication long-term evolution-vehicle
  • V2V Vehicle-to-vehicle
  • This solution can achieve the combined gain of multiple transmissions of the same transmission block, and for the initial transmission of one transmission block.
  • DMRS configurations with different numbers of DMRS symbols are supported, so that when the channel status changes, the number of DMRS symbols can be adjusted to improve the accuracy of channel estimation, thereby ensuring the transmission reliability of the transport block.
  • a method for determining the size of a transmission block is provided.
  • the method can be applied to the sending end of V2X or the receiving end of V2X.
  • the method includes: determining a physical resource block PRB of the first time-frequency resource
  • the first time-frequency resource includes the first time unit in the time domain, and may include one subchannel or multiple consecutive subchannels in the frequency domain.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may be Occupying one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels, the PSCCH can occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in a sub-channel; according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead, the number of resource elements RE used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is determined, and the first The number of REs used for data transmission in a time-frequency resource can also be replaced with the number of REs available in the first time-frequency resource or the number of REs allocated to the PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource; wherein, the number of REs used for data transmission Used to determine the PSSCH transport block size TBS.
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end may first determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource, and determine the first time-frequency resource according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead The number of REs used to transmit data in. Since the PSSCH DMRS overhead is the average number of REs occupied by PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations, rather than the actual number of REs occupied by PSSCH DMRS during a single transmission, the PSSCH DMRS overhead is determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead for the initial transmission and retransmission.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is constant, so the TBS determined according to the number of REs used to transmit data is the same, so that the transmission block combination of initial transmission and retransmission in the side link communication process can be realized. In order to achieve the combined gain.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is determined according to the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS. Therefore, the PSSCH can be allowed to carry different numbers of DMRS symbols during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS.
  • the number of DMRS symbols can be increased to improve the accuracy of channel estimation and ensure transmission reliability; at the same time, when the channel status is better In this case, the throughput of PSSCH can be improved by reducing the number of DMRS symbols.
  • the overhead is the average number of occupied REs; wherein, the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource may mean that the PSSCH DMRS is the first in the time domain.
  • One time unit and frequency domain is the average number of REs occupied in physical resources of one PRB.
  • determining the PSSCH DMRS overhead in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource includes: according to the DMRS under each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource The number of symbols determines the PSSCH DMRS overhead in one PRB of the first time-frequency resource.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to the DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations.
  • a certain number of DMRS symbols are correspondingly set in each DMRS configuration, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by the DMRS or symbols used to transmit the DMRS.
  • the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by the DMRS or symbols used to transmit the DMRS.
  • the number of symbols is used to improve the PSSCH decoding efficiency, or the number of DMRS symbols is reduced when the SINR is increased to improve the PSSCH throughput.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS satisfies the following formula; where, Represents the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS, N represents the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, and k n represents the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration, Represents the number of subcarriers included in a PRB, P represents the DMRS frequency domain density, and P is a positive integer;
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in one PRB, and one PRB is within the first time unit
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where N RE represents the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource, Indicates the number of sub-carriers included in a PRB, Represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols of a PRB in the first time unit, Represents the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB, x represents the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS in a PRB, Indicates the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, N SCI1 indicates the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and N SCI2 indicates the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where, N RE represents the number of REs used by the first time-frequency resource to transmit data, and Q represents the upper limit of the number of REs used to determine TBS in a PRB, Indicates the number of sub-carriers included in a PRB, Represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols of a PRB in the first time unit, Represents the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB, x represents the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS in a PRB, Represents the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, N SCI1 represents the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and N SCI2 represents the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource can be uniquely determined, that is, the TBS of the transmission block can be uniquely determined. In this way, the combined gain of multiple transmissions of the same transmission block is realized.
  • the method may further include: determining the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used for data transmission; and sending the transmission block.
  • the method may further include: determining the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; and receiving the transmission block.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead, and is unchanged for the initial transmission and retransmission, so that the number of REs used for transmission is unchanged.
  • the TBS determined by the number of REs that transmit data is the same, so that the transmission block combination of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process can be realized to realize the combination gain.
  • a device for determining a transmission block size is provided.
  • the device can be applied to the sending end of V2X or the receiving end of V2X.
  • the device includes: a processing unit for determining one of the first time-frequency resources The overhead of the PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS in the physical resource block PRB.
  • the first time-frequency resource includes the first time unit in the time domain; the processing unit is also used to determine the first time according to the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS
  • the number of resource element REs used for data transmission in the frequency resource, the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource can also be replaced by the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource or the first time-frequency resource allocated to the PSSCH
  • the number of REs; where the number of REs used to transmit data is used to determine the PSSCH transport block size TBS.
  • the overhead is the average number of occupied REs; wherein, the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource may mean that the PSSCH DMRS is the first in the time domain.
  • One time unit and frequency domain is the average number of REs occupied in physical resources of one PRB.
  • the processing unit is further configured to: determine one of the first time-frequency resources according to the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource PSSCH DMRS overhead in PRB.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to the DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations. A certain number of DMRS symbols are correspondingly set in each DMRS configuration, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by the DMRS or symbols used to transmit the DMRS.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS satisfies the following formula; where, Represents the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS, N represents the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, and k n represents the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration, Represents the number of subcarriers included in a PRB, P represents the DMRS frequency domain density, and P is a positive integer;
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in one PRB, and one PRB is within the first time unit
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where N RE represents the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource, Indicates the number of sub-carriers included in a PRB, Represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols of a PRB in the first time unit, Represents the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB, x represents the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS in a PRB, Indicates the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, N SCI1 indicates the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and N SCI2 indicates the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where, N RE represents the number of REs used by the first time-frequency resource to transmit data, and Q represents the upper limit of the number of REs used to determine TBS in a PRB, Indicates the number of sub-carriers included in a PRB, Represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols of a PRB in the first time unit, Represents the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB, x represents the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS in a PRB, Represents the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, N SCI1 represents the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and N SCI2 represents the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the device further includes a sending unit; the processing unit is further configured to determine the transmission block size according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; and the sending unit is configured to send The transfer block.
  • the device further includes a receiving unit; a processing unit, which is further configured to determine the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; and the receiving unit is also configured to receive the transmission block .
  • a method for determining the size of a transmission block is provided.
  • the method can be applied to the sending end of V2X or the receiving end of V2X.
  • the method includes: configuring DMRS according to the demodulation reference signal corresponding to the first time-frequency resource The number of DMRS configurations in the set, and the first overhead of the side row data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set, determine the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource Two overhead, the first time-frequency resource includes the first time unit in the time domain; according to the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS, the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is determined, and the first time-frequency resource is used for The number of REs that transmit data can also be replaced with the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource or the number of REs allocated to the PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource; wherein the number of REs used
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end can first determine the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource, and determine the first time-frequency according to the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS The number of REs used to transmit data in the resource.
  • the PSSCH DMRS Since the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS is the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations, rather than the actual number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS during a single transmission, the PSSCH DMRS The number of REs used to transmit data determined by the second overhead is unchanged, so the TBS determined according to the number of REs used to transmit data are the same, so that the initial transmission and retransmission in the side-link communication process can be realized The transmission block is combined to realize the combined gain. In addition, when determining the TBS in this solution, the number of REs used for data transmission is determined based on the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations in the first time-frequency resource.
  • Different numbers of DMRS symbols are carried in the retransmission process. This ensures that if the channel status changes during the initial transmission and retransmission of a transport block, the number of DMRS symbols can be increased to improve the accuracy of channel estimation and ensure Transmission reliability is guaranteed; at the same time, when the channel status is good, the throughput of PSSCH can be improved by reducing the number of DMRS symbols.
  • the overhead is the average number of occupied REs.
  • the first overhead of PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under each DMRS configuration; the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to the PSSCH
  • the average number of REs occupied by the DMRS in the first time-frequency resource may specifically be the average value of the first overhead of the PSSCH and the DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations.
  • the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS satisfies the following formula; where N DMRS represents the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource, and N represents the first time-frequency resource
  • N DMRS represents the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource
  • the number of DMRS configurations in the corresponding DMRS configuration set Represents the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource in the nth DMRS configuration
  • the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS is determined according to the first overhead of the PSCCH DMRS under each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set, thereby allowing the PSSCH to carry different data during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS.
  • the number of DMRS symbols can ensure that if the channel state changes during the initial transmission and retransmission of a transport block, the number of DMRS symbols can be increased to improve the accuracy of channel estimation and ensure transmission reliability; at the same time; In the case of good channel conditions, the throughput of PSSCH can be improved by reducing the number of DMRS symbols.
  • the method further includes: determining the first time in the nth DMRS configuration according to the number of DMRS symbols in the nth DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set and the DMRS frequency domain density The first overhead of PSSCH and DMRS in frequency resources.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to the DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations. A certain number of DMRS symbols are correspondingly set in each DMRS configuration, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by the DMRS or symbols used to transmit the DMRS.
  • the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS is determined according to the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set, which allows the PSSCH to carry different data during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS.
  • the number of DMRS symbols In this way, by setting different numbers of DMRS symbols, you can increase the number of DMRS symbols to improve PSSCH decoding efficiency when the channel status is poor or the SINR decreases, or reduce the number of DMRS symbols when the channel status is better or the SINR increases. PSSCH channel throughput.
  • the first overhead quantity of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource in the nth DMRS configuration Meet the following formula:
  • the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under the nth DMRS configuration satisfies the following formula:
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the first time-frequency resource can be accurately determined, so as to determine the TBS of the transmission block.
  • the purpose of the rate is to reduce the waste of resources caused by the transmission code rate being too low or the transmission unreliability caused by the high code rate.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in one physical resource block PRB, and the number of subcarriers in the first time unit
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where N RE represents the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource, Indicates the number of sub-carriers included in a PRB, Represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit, x represents the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS in a PRB, Represents the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, N SCI1 represents the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and N SCI2 represents the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where Q represents the upper limit of the number of REs used to determine TBS in a PRB;
  • the accuracy of the number of REs used for data transmission can be improved when determining the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource. sex.
  • the method may further include: determining the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used for data transmission; and sending the transmission block.
  • the method may further include: determining the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; and receiving the transmission block.
  • a device for determining the size of a transmission block is provided.
  • the device can be applied to the sending end of V2X or the receiving end of V2X.
  • the device includes: a processing unit configured to determine the size of the transmission block according to the corresponding solution of the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource includes the first time unit in the time domain; the processing unit is also used to determine the data transmission in the first time-frequency resource according to the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS
  • the number of REs, the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource can also be replaced by the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource or the number of REs allocated to the PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource; wherein, the number of REs used for transmission
  • the number of data REs is used to determine the PSSCH transport block size TBS.
  • the overhead is the average number of occupied REs.
  • the first overhead of PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under each DMRS configuration; the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to the PSSCH
  • the average number of REs occupied by the DMRS in the first time-frequency resource may specifically be the average value of the first overhead of the PSSCH and the DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations.
  • the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS satisfies the following formula; where N DMRS represents the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource, and N represents the first time-frequency resource
  • N DMRS represents the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource
  • the number of DMRS configurations in the corresponding DMRS configuration set Represents the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource in the nth DMRS configuration
  • the method further includes: determining the first time in the nth DMRS configuration according to the number of DMRS symbols in the nth DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set and the DMRS frequency domain density The first overhead of PSSCH and DMRS in frequency resources.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to the DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations. A certain number of DMRS symbols are correspondingly set in each DMRS configuration, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by the DMRS or symbols used to transmit the DMRS.
  • the first overhead quantity of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource in the nth DMRS configuration Meet the following formula:
  • the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under the nth DMRS configuration satisfies the following formula:
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in one physical resource block PRB, and the number of subcarriers in the first time unit
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where N RE represents the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource, Indicates the number of sub-carriers included in a PRB, Represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit, x represents the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS in a PRB, Represents the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, N SCI1 represents the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and N SCI2 represents the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula; where Q represents the upper limit of the number of REs used to determine TBS in a PRB;
  • the device further includes a sending unit; the processing unit is further configured to determine the transmission block size according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; and the sending unit is configured to send The transfer block.
  • the device further includes a receiving unit; a processing unit, which is further configured to determine the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; and the receiving unit is also configured to receive the transmission block .
  • a method for determining the size of a transmission block can be applied to a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can be a V2X sender.
  • the method includes: the first terminal device sends the first terminal device to the second terminal device.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the overhead of the side row data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS
  • the first indication information indicates
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information of the second control information can be used to determine the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource; the first terminal device determines the sideline data channel according to the adjustment factor of the second control information and/or the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS PSSCH transport block size TBS.
  • this method can ensure that the transmitting end and the receiving end ensure that the determined second control information overhead and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead are the same when determining the TBS, thereby ensuring that the TBS determined by the transmitting end and the receiving end are consistent In this way, the transmission block combination of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process can be realized to realize the combination gain.
  • the overhead may refer to the average number of occupied REs.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first indication information is 1 bit.
  • the foregoing possible implementation manners can reduce the number of bits occupied by the first indication information.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information, or the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the average value of at least one configured adjustment factor
  • the second indication information may indicate different adjustment factors of the second control information in an implicit indication manner, thereby improving the indication flexibility and diversity of the second indication information.
  • the first indication information is an adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information.
  • ⁇ ' is a positive integer
  • ⁇ ' is any one of the set of adjustment factors corresponding to the configured second control information, or ⁇ 'is greater than or equal to the minimum value in the set of adjustment factors and less than or equal to the set of adjustment factors The maximum value in.
  • the second indication information may indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information in an explicit indication manner.
  • the second indication information may specifically be an index value of the adjustment factor of the second control information.
  • the second indication information is 1 bit.
  • the foregoing possible implementation manners can reduce the number of bits occupied by the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate PSSCH DMRS overhead, including: the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS determined according to the number of DMRS symbols carried in the first control information Or, the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration.
  • the transmission block combination of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process can be implemented to achieve a combination gain.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is determined according to the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the PSSCH can be allowed to carry different numbers of DMRS symbols during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS.
  • the number of DMRS symbols can be increased to improve the accuracy of channel estimation and ensure transmission reliability; at the same time, when the channel status is better
  • the throughput of PSSCH can be improved by reducing the number of DMRS symbols.
  • the method may further include: the first terminal device determines the transmission block size according to the determined number of REs used for data transmission; and the first terminal device sends the transmission block.
  • a method for determining a transmission block size is provided.
  • the method can be applied to a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device can be a V2X receiver.
  • the method includes: the second terminal device receives the first terminal device from the first terminal device.
  • One indication information and/or second indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the overhead of the side-line data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS; the second terminal equipment Determine the PSSCH transport block size TBS of the side row data channel according to the adjustment factor of the second control information and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • this method can ensure that the transmitting end and the receiving end ensure that the determined second control information overhead and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead are the same when determining the TBS, thereby ensuring that the TBS determined by the transmitting end and the receiving end are consistent In this way, the transmission block combination of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process can be realized to realize the combination gain.
  • the overhead may refer to the average number of occupied REs.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first indication information is 1 bit.
  • the foregoing possible implementation manners can reduce the number of bits occupied by the first indication information.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information, or the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the average value of at least one configured adjustment factor
  • the second indication information may indicate different adjustment factors of the second control information in an implicit indication manner, thereby improving the indication flexibility and diversity of the second indication information.
  • the first indication information is an adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information.
  • ⁇ ' is a positive integer
  • ⁇ ' is any one of the set of adjustment factors corresponding to the configured second control information, or ⁇ 'is greater than or equal to the minimum value in the set of adjustment factors and less than or equal to the set of adjustment factors The maximum value in.
  • the second indication information may indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information in an explicit indication manner.
  • the second indication information may specifically be an index value of the adjustment factor of the second control information.
  • the second indication information is 1 bit.
  • the foregoing possible implementation manners can reduce the number of bits occupied by the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead, including: the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS determined according to the number of DMRS symbols carried in the first control information Or, the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration.
  • the transmission block combination of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process can be implemented to achieve a combination gain.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is determined according to the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the PSSCH can be allowed to carry different numbers of DMRS symbols during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS.
  • the number of DMRS symbols can be increased to improve the accuracy of channel estimation and ensure transmission reliability; at the same time, when the channel status is better
  • the throughput of PSSCH can be improved by reducing the number of DMRS symbols.
  • the method may further include: the second terminal device determines the transmission block size according to the determined number of REs used for data transmission; and the second terminal device receives the transmission block.
  • a device for determining a transmission block size can be applied to a first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device can be a V2X sender.
  • the device includes: a sending unit configured to send the first terminal device to the second terminal device.
  • One indication information and/or second indication information the first indication information is used to indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the overhead of the side row data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS; the processing unit uses Determine the PSSCH transport block size TBS of the side row data channel according to the adjustment factor of the second control information and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the overhead may refer to the average number of occupied REs.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first indication information is 1 bit.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information, or the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the average value of at least one configured adjustment factor
  • the first indication information is an adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information.
  • ⁇ ' is a positive integer
  • ⁇ ' is any one of the set of adjustment factors corresponding to the configured second control information, or ⁇ 'is greater than or equal to the minimum value in the set of adjustment factors and less than or equal to the set of adjustment factors The maximum value in.
  • the second indication information is 1 bit.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate PSSCH DMRS overhead, including: the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS determined according to the number of DMRS symbols carried in the first control information Or, the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used for data transmission; the sending unit is further configured to send the transmission block.
  • a device for determining a transmission block size is provided.
  • the device can be applied to a second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device can be a receiving end of V2X.
  • the device includes: a receiving unit for receiving data from the first terminal device.
  • the first indication information and/or the second indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the overhead of the side row data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS; a processing unit, It is used to determine the PSSCH transport block size TBS of the side row data channel according to the adjustment factor of the second control information and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the overhead may refer to the average number of occupied REs.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first indication information is 1 bit.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information, or the adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the average value of at least one configured adjustment factor
  • the first indication information is an adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information.
  • ⁇ ' is a positive integer
  • ⁇ ' is any one of the set of adjustment factors corresponding to the configured second control information, or ⁇ 'is greater than or equal to the minimum value in the set of adjustment factors and less than or equal to the set of adjustment factors The maximum value in.
  • the second indication information is 1 bit.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate PSSCH DMRS overhead, including: the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS determined according to the number of DMRS symbols carried in the first control information Or, the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine the size of the transmission block according to the determined number of REs used to transmit data; the receiving unit is further configured to receive the transmission block.
  • a method for determining a symbol of a demodulation reference signal for a sideline data channel is provided.
  • the method can be applied to the transmitting end of V2X or the receiving end of V2X.
  • the method includes: according to the first time-frequency resource
  • the number of DMRS symbols of the side row data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS and the number of reference symbols of the side row data channel PSSCH are determined to determine the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource; wherein, the first time Frequency resources include the first time unit in the time domain, and may include one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels in the frequency domain.
  • PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels, and PSCCH may occupy one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels. Multiple consecutive PRBs in a sub-channel.
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end can determine that the PSSCH DMRS is in the first time-frequency resource according to the number of DMRS symbols of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource and the number of reference symbols of the PSSCH.
  • the symbol mapping position in the time-frequency resource so that the transmitting end and the receiving end can quickly and efficiently determine the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols defined by this scheme is the number of symbols included in the first time unit.
  • the influence of the number of symbols occupied by the PSFCH, the influence of the AGC symbol and the last GAP symbol in the first time unit are excluded, and the influence of the PSCCH is excluded according to the relationship between the number of PRBs contained in the PSSCH and the PSCCH, and the parameters are determined.
  • This way on the one hand, it can ensure that the existing PSSCH DMRS configuration can work when the PSSCH and PSCCH bandwidths are the same, and on the other hand, it can ensure that the usage scenarios of the number of symbols included in the PSSCH DMRS configuration are not affected by the presence of PSFCH.
  • the number of reference symbols is the number of symbols determined according to at least one of the following: symbol overhead of the side control channel excluded in the first time unit; and excluded in the first time unit The symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel; the automatic gain control AGC symbol excluded in the first time unit; the last gap GAP symbol excluded in the first time unit.
  • the foregoing possible implementation manners determine the number of reference symbols by considering different symbol overheads, which can improve the accuracy of determining the number of reference symbols.
  • the number of reference symbols is determined by first configuration information
  • the first configuration information includes at least one of the following: the number of symbols included in the first time unit, and the feedback configuration of the side-line feedback channel Period information, the number of symbols included in the side-line feedback channel and the guard interval of the side-line feedback channel, the relationship between the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH and the number of PRBs included in the side-line control channel.
  • the number of reference symbols included in the PSSCH when the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is not equal to the number of PRBs included in the side row control channel, the number of reference symbols satisfies the following formula; where, Indicates the number of reference symbols, Represents the number of symbols of the last gap GAP symbol and/or automatic gain control AGC symbol excluded in the first time unit, Represents the symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel; where the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3;
  • the number of reference symbols can be accurately determined when the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is not equal to the number of PRBs included in the side row control channel.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot is in, Indicates the starting symbol position of the first time unit, Indicates the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot may be determined by the start symbol position of the first time unit and the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit. The symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot starts from the first symbol position, thereby greatly improving the decoding efficiency.
  • the number of reference symbols included in the PSSCH when the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is equal to the number of PRBs included in the side row control channel, the number of reference symbols satisfies the following formula; where, Indicates the number of reference symbols, Represents the number of symbols that exclude the last gap GAP symbol and/or automatic gain control AGC symbol in the first time unit, Indicates the symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel, Indicates the symbol overhead of the side control channel; where the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3;
  • the number of reference symbols can be accurately determined when the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is equal to the number of PRBs included in the side row control channel.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot is in, Indicates the starting symbol position of the first time unit, Represents the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit, Indicates the symbol overhead of the side-line control channel.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot may be determined by the start symbol position of the first time unit and the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit. The symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot starts from the first symbol position, thereby greatly improving the decoding efficiency.
  • the symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel is related to the feedback configuration period information of the side-line feedback channel.
  • the exceeding symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS is not mapped to the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the symbol mapping positions of the PSSCH DMRS are respectively sym1, sym4, sym7, and sym10, and the PSSCH containing symbols are from sym1 to sym9, then sym10 exceeds the PSSCH containing symbols, so that the PSSCH DMRS is not mapped on sym10 .
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource is also related to the symbol overhead of the side control channel.
  • the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 2, that is, the PSCCH occupies 2 symbols in the first time unit; or, the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 3, that is, the PSCCH occupies 3 symbols in the first time unit.
  • a device for determining a symbol of a demodulation reference signal for a sideline data channel is provided.
  • the device can be applied to the transmitting end of V2X or the receiving end of V2X.
  • the device includes: a processing unit for The number of DMRS symbols of the side-line data channel PSSCH demodulation reference signal DMRS in a time-frequency resource, and the number of reference symbols of the side-line data channel PSSCH, determine the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource;
  • the first time-frequency resource includes the first time unit in the time domain, and may include one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels in the frequency domain.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels.
  • PSCCH can occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in a sub-channel.
  • the number of reference symbols is a number of symbols determined according to at least one of the following: the symbol overhead of the side control channel excluded in the first time unit; and the symbol overhead of the side control channel excluded in the first time unit The symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel; the automatic gain control AGC symbol excluded in the first time unit; the last gap GAP symbol excluded in the first time unit.
  • the number of reference symbols is determined by first configuration information
  • the first configuration information includes at least one of the following: the number of symbols included in the first time unit, and the feedback configuration of the side-line feedback channel Period information, the number of symbols included in the side-line feedback channel and the guard interval of the side-line feedback channel, the relationship between the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH and the number of PRBs included in the side-line control channel.
  • the number of reference symbols included in the PSSCH when the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is not equal to the number of PRBs included in the side row control channel, the number of reference symbols satisfies the following formula; where, Indicates the number of reference symbols, Represents the number of symbols of the last gap GAP symbol and/or automatic gain control AGC symbol excluded in the first time unit, Represents the symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel; where the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3;
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot is in, Indicates the starting symbol position of the first time unit, Indicates the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit.
  • the number of reference symbols included in the PSSCH when the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is equal to the number of PRBs included in the side row control channel, the number of reference symbols satisfies the following formula; where, Indicates the number of reference symbols, Represents the number of symbols that exclude the last gap GAP symbol and/or automatic gain control AGC symbol in the first time unit, Indicates the symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel, Indicates the symbol overhead of the side control channel; where the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3;
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot is in, Indicates the starting symbol position of the first time unit, Represents the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit, Indicates the symbol overhead of the side-line control channel.
  • the symbol overhead of the side-line feedback channel is related to the feedback configuration period information of the side-line feedback channel.
  • the exceeding symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS when the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS exceeds the included symbol of the PSSCH, the exceeding symbol mapping position is not mapped to the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the symbol mapping positions of the PSSCH DMRS are respectively sym1, sym4, sym7, and sym10, and the PSSCH containing symbols are from sym1 to sym9, then sym10 exceeds the PSSCH containing symbols, so that the PSSCH DMRS is not mapped on sym10 .
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource is also related to the symbol overhead of the side control channel.
  • the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 2, that is, the PSCCH occupies 2 symbols in the first time unit; or, the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 3, that is, the PSCCH occupies 3 symbols in the first time unit.
  • a communication device in another aspect of the present application, includes a processor and a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the processor can be used to execute instructions in the memory so that the device executes the first Aspect or the method provided in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the device further includes a communication interface and a bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled through the bus.
  • a communication device in another aspect of the present application, includes a processor and a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the processor can be used to execute instructions in the memory so that the device executes the third Aspect or the method provided in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the device further includes a communication interface and a bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled through the bus.
  • a communication device in another aspect of the present application, includes a processor and a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the processor can be used to execute instructions in the memory so that the device executes the fifth Aspect or the method provided by any one of the possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect.
  • the device further includes a communication interface and a bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled through the bus.
  • a communication device in another aspect of the present application, includes a processor and a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the processor can be used to execute instructions in the memory so that the device executes the sixth Aspect or the method provided in any one of the possible implementation manners of the sixth aspect.
  • the device further includes a communication interface and a bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled through the bus.
  • a communication device in another aspect of the present application, includes a processor and a memory coupled to the processor.
  • the processor can be used to execute instructions in the memory so that the device executes the above-mentioned ninth Aspect or the method provided by any one of the possible implementation manners of the ninth aspect.
  • the device further includes a communication interface and a bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are coupled through the bus.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor, and the processor is configured to run the code Instructions to make the device execute the method in the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor, and the processor is configured to run the code Instructions, so that the device executes the foregoing second aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor, and the processor is configured to run the code Instructions to make the device execute the method provided in the third aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor, and the processor is configured to run the code Instructions, so that the device executes the method provided in the fifth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor, and the processor is configured to run the code Instructions, so that the device executes the method provided in the sixth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the sixth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device that includes a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive code instructions and transmit them to the processor, and the processor is configured to run the code Instructions, so that the device executes the method provided in the foregoing ninth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the ninth aspect.
  • a communication system in another aspect of the present application, includes a network device, a first terminal device, and a second terminal device; wherein the first terminal device is used to perform any of the above-mentioned first aspect or the first aspect.
  • a method provided by a possible implementation manner, or implementation of the method provided by the foregoing third aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect, or implementation of the foregoing fifth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect The method provided, or the method provided in any one of the above-mentioned ninth aspect or the ninth aspect; the second terminal device is used to execute the method provided in the above-mentioned first or the first aspect , Or execute the method provided in the third aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the third aspect, or execute the method provided in the sixth or the sixth aspect, or execute the method provided in any of the foregoing
  • the ninth aspect or the method provided in any one of the possible implementation manners of the ninth aspect is provided.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also referred to as code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect Or the method provided in any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instruction
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the third aspect described above. Or the method provided in any possible implementation of the third aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned fifth aspect Or the method provided in any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the sixth aspect. Or the method provided in any possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned ninth aspect Or the method provided in any one of the possible implementation manners of the ninth aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned One aspect or the method provided in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned The method provided in any one of the three aspects or the third aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned The method provided by any one of the five or fifth aspects.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned The method provided by the sixth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when it runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned The method provided by the ninth aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners of the ninth aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • any of the transmission block size determination methods and the device, computer storage medium, or computer program product for determining the symbol of the demodulation reference signal of the side row data channel provided above are all used to execute the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, the beneficial effects that can be achieved can be referred to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method provided above, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a first time-frequency resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining the size of a transmission block according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining the size of a transmission block according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of another first time-frequency resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another first time-frequency resource provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for determining a transmission block size provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of another apparatus for determining a transmission block size according to an embodiment of the application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • the following at least one item (a) or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • the embodiments of the present application use words such as "first" and "second” to distinguish the same items or similar items that have substantially the same function and effect.
  • the first threshold and the second threshold are only for distinguishing different thresholds, and the order of their order is not limited. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order.
  • the "*" in the formula involved in the embodiments of this application represents a multiplication sign.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • the V2X scenario may specifically be any of the following systems: vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P), vehicle-to-network (V2N) business Communication with vehicles and infrastructure (V2I), etc.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • V2I business Communication with vehicles and infrastructure
  • D2D may be long term evolution (LTE) D2D, new radio (NR) D2D, and may also be D2D in other communication systems that may appear with the development of technology.
  • V2X can be LTE V2X, NR V2X, and can also be V2X in other communication systems that may emerge with the development of technology.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • the communication system includes: an access network device 10 and at least two terminal devices 20.
  • the access network device 10 can communicate with at least two terminal devices 20, and at least two terminal devices 20 can also communicate with each other. Communication.
  • at least two terminal devices 20 including a terminal device 21 and a terminal device 22 are taken as an example for illustration.
  • the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22 may be two terminals in the same public land mobile network (PLMN)
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the device can also be two terminal devices in different PLMNs.
  • the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22 are both terminal devices in PLMN1; in Figure 1 (b), the terminal device 21 is the terminal device in PLMN1, and the terminal Device 22 is not a terminal device in PLMN1.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 1 may further include: a core network.
  • the access network device 10 may be connected to the core network.
  • the core network may be a 4G core network (for example, evolved packet core (EPC)) or a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC), or a core network in various future communication systems.
  • EPC evolved packet core
  • 5G Core 5G Core
  • the access network device 10 may be an evolved Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in a 4G system.
  • the terminal device 21 may be a terminal device that performs information transmission with an eNB.
  • the eNB accesses the EPC network through the S1 interface.
  • the access network device 10 may be the next generation node B (gNB) in the NR system, and the terminal device 21 may be a terminal device that performs information transmission with the gNB.
  • the gNB connects to the 5G core network through the NG interface.
  • the access network device 10 may also be a third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) protocol base station, or may be a non-3GPP protocol base station.
  • 3GPP third generation partnership project
  • first transmission link between the access network device 10 and the terminal device 21 or the terminal device 22.
  • the first transmission link may be a Uu link, which may be used to transmit Uu services.
  • second transmission link between the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22.
  • the second transmission link may be a sidelink (SL), which may be used to transmit V2X services.
  • the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22 may transmit V2X services to each other on the side link, which may also be referred to as side link information.
  • the terminal device 21 or the terminal device 22 can transmit uplink (UL) Uu services to the access network device 10 on the Uu link, and can also receive the downlink (downlink, DL) sent by the access network device 10 on the Uu link.
  • UL uplink
  • DL downlink
  • the direct communication interface between the terminal device 21 and the terminal device 22 may be the interface 1.
  • the interface 1 can be called a PC5 interface, and uses a dedicated frequency band (such as 5.9 GHz) for the Internet of Vehicles.
  • the interface between the terminal device 21 and the access network device 10 may be called interface 2 (for example, Uu interface), and adopts a cellular network frequency band (for example, 1.8 GHz).
  • the above-mentioned names of interface 1 and interface 2 are only examples, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the names of interface 1 and interface 2.
  • the terminal device 21 or the terminal device 22 may be a device with a wireless communication function, and may be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, handheld or vehicle-mounted. It can also be deployed on the water (such as ships, etc.). It can also be deployed in the air (for example, on airplanes, balloons, satellites, etc.). Terminal equipment is also called user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), and terminal equipment, etc., which provide users with voice and/or data connectivity device of.
  • terminal devices include handheld devices with wireless connection functions, vehicle-mounted devices, and so on.
  • terminal devices can be: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablets, laptops, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), wearable devices (such as smart watches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc.) , In-vehicle equipment (for example, cars, bicycles, electric cars, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed rail, etc.), virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, industrial control (industrial control) Wireless terminals, smart home equipment (for example, refrigerators, TVs, air conditioners, electric meters, etc.), smart robots, workshop equipment, wireless terminals in self-driving, and wireless terminals in remote medical surgery , Wireless terminal equipment in smart grid, wireless terminal equipment in transportation safety, wireless terminal equipment in smart city, or wireless terminal equipment in smart home, Flying equipment (for example, smart robots, hot air balloons, drones, airplanes), etc.
  • In-vehicle equipment for example, cars, bicycles, electric cars, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed rail, etc.
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented
  • the terminal device is a terminal device that often works on the ground, such as a vehicle-mounted device.
  • chips deployed in the above-mentioned devices such as system-on-a-chip (SOC), baseband chips, etc., or other chips with communication functions may also be referred to as terminal devices.
  • the terminal device 21 or the terminal device 22 may be a vehicle with a corresponding communication function, or a vehicle-mounted communication device, or other embedded communication device, and may also be a user-held communication device, including a mobile phone, a tablet computer, and the like.
  • the terminal device 21 or the terminal device 22 may also include a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design everyday wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • the access network device 10 is an entity that is used in conjunction with the terminal device 21 or the terminal device 22 and can be used to transmit or receive signals.
  • it can be an access point (AP) in WLAN, an evolved NodeB (eNB or eNodeB) in LTE, or a relay station or access point, or a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device And the network equipment in the future 5G network or the access network equipment in the future evolved PLMN network, etc.
  • the access network device provides services for the cell, and the transmission resource (for example, time domain resource, or frequency domain resource, or time-frequency resource) used by the terminal device through the cell is connected to the access network
  • the device communicates.
  • the cell may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station).
  • the cell may belong to a macro base station or a base station corresponding to a small cell.
  • the small cell here may include: metro cell and micro cell. These small cells, such as micro cells, pico cells, and femto cells, have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmit power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • S Sidelink
  • the physical layer of the side link mainly includes four channel types, namely the side link physical layer control channel (PSCCH), the side link physical layer shared channel (physical sidelink share channel, PSSCH), and the side link physical layer control channel (PSCCH).
  • the uplink physical layer broadcast channel and the sidelink physical layer feedback channel (physical sidelink feedback channel, PSFCH).
  • the side-link physical layer control channel may be called PSCCH or the side-line control channel
  • the side-link physical layer shared channel may be called the PSSCH or the side-line data channel.
  • the physical layer feedback channel may be referred to as PSFCH or side feedback channel.
  • the time-frequency resources of side-link communication are configured based on the resource pool of side-link communication.
  • the resource pool can refer to the collection of time resources and frequency resources used for side-link communication.
  • Time resources can also be called It is a time domain resource, and a frequency resource can also be called a time domain resource.
  • the time domain resource can be represented by a frame, a sub-frame, a slot, or a symbol; among them, a frame can include multiple subframes, and a subframe can include Multiple time slots, one time slot can include multiple symbols, for example, one time slot can include 14 symbols.
  • Frequency domain resources can be represented by sub-channels (sub-channels), physical resource blocks (PRBs), or sub-carriers (sub-carriers, SC), etc.; among them, a sub-channel can include multiple consecutive channels in the frequency domain.
  • PRB, a PRB may include multiple subcarriers, and the PRB may also be referred to as a resource block (resource block, RB).
  • PSCCH can occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in a sub-channel in the frequency domain
  • PSSCH can occupy one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels in the frequency domain
  • PSCCH and PSSCH can occupy one or more SLs in the time domain.
  • Time unit, each time unit may include multiple consecutive symbols, and these multiple consecutive symbols can be configured through radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling, which can be specifically configured by configuring the starting symbol position And the number of symbols to determine. For example, if the start symbol position of the SL time unit configured by RRC signaling If it is 0 and the number of symbols is 14, then the time unit can be a time slot.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the side-line data channel demodulation reference signal refers to a reference signal used to demodulate the PSSCH, and may also be referred to as a pilot signal used to demodulate the PSSCH.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the abbreviation of the demodulation reference signal of the side row data channel can be expressed as PSSCH DMRS.
  • the DMRS configuration mentioned below may refer to the configuration of the DMRS time domain pattern, that is, the DMRS configuration and the configuration of the DMRS time domain pattern can be replaced with each other.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource referred to below may refer to the number of REs occupied by data carried in the first time-frequency resource, and may also be referred to as the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource. It may refer to the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource (the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH), and the foregoing descriptions can be replaced with each other.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in a PRB in the first time unit involved in the following can also be replaced with the number of REs allocated for PSSCH within a PRB (the number of REs allocated for PSSCH within a PRB).
  • the symbols in this text can be orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols, that is, the symbols in this text can be replaced with OFDM symbols.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining the size of a transmission block provided by the present application.
  • the method can be applied to the sending end and the receiving end.
  • the sending end and the receiving end may be two terminal devices communicating in a D2D manner.
  • the sending end may be called a first terminal device, and the receiving end may be called a second terminal device.
  • the steps in the method are described in detail below.
  • S201 Determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead in one PRB of the first time-frequency resource, where the first time-frequency resource includes a first time unit in the time domain.
  • the first time-frequency resource is a time-frequency resource used for sidelink communication, and the time-frequency resource may include a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include a first time unit in the time domain, the first time unit may include multiple symbols, and the first time unit may be configured by a network-side device, which may be an access network device or a core network The device, for example, the network side device may configure the first time unit by configuring the first start symbol of the plurality of symbols and the number of the plurality of symbols.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels in the frequency domain. Each sub-channel may include multiple consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain.
  • This one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels may be used by the network side device.
  • Configuration for example, for any subchannel, the network side device can configure the sequence number of the first PRB among the multiple PRBs included in the subchannel and the number of PRBs included in the subchannel to configure the subchannel.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels, and the PSCCH may occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in one sub-channel.
  • the first time unit of the first time-frequency resource in the time domain may include 14 symbols, which are sequentially represented as sym0 to sym13, and the sub-channels occupied in the frequency domain may include 7 PRBs in total.
  • the PSSCH DMRS and the PSCCH can have two situations in the time domain, and the PSSCH DMRS and the PSCCH overlap in the time domain respectively (as shown in (a) in Figure 3). (Shown), and the PSSCH DMRS and PSCCH do not overlap in the time domain (as shown in (b) in Figure 3).
  • AGC in Figure 3 represents a symbol used for automatic gain control (AGC), and its length can be 1 symbol (as shown in Figure 3) or the first Y symbols in the first time unit, where Y is a natural number. Such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • GAP represents the last gap (gap) symbol.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS, so that the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource may refer to the PSSCH DMRS being the first in the time domain.
  • the time unit and frequency domain are the average number of REs occupied in the physical resources of a PRB.
  • determining the PSSCH DMRS overhead in one PRB of the first time-frequency resource may include: determining the first time-frequency resource according to the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource The overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in one PRB.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to a DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations, and each DMRS configuration is correspondingly set with a certain number of DMRS symbols, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by DMRS or symbols used to transmit DMRS.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource is ⁇ 2, 3, 4 ⁇
  • the DMRS configuration set includes 3 DMRS configurations.
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 2 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 2
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 3 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 3
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 4 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 4.
  • the overhead of PSSCH DMRS in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource may be specifically based on the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration, and the number of DMRS symbols in a PRB.
  • the number of subcarriers included and the frequency domain density are determined.
  • N represents the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource
  • k n represents the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration
  • P represents the DMRS frequency domain density (that is, one RE maps the DMRS in each P RE)
  • P is a positive integer.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead The following formula (1-1) is satisfied.
  • P can be a constant, for example, P can be equal to 2, 3, 4, etc., and the specific value of P can be set in advance.
  • S202 Determine the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource according to the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS, and the number of REs used for data transmission is used to determine the TBS of the PSSCH.
  • the data in the RE used for data transmission refers to the data of the transmission block TB, and the data does not include control information, DMRS, and other reference signals (RS).
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the number of REs occupied by data carried in the first time-frequency resource, may also be referred to as the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource, or may refer to the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of REs allocated to the PSSCH in the one-time-frequency resource When determining the PSSCH DMRS overhead in one PRB of the first time-frequency resource, the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may be determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in one PRB, the number of PSSCH reference symbols of one PRB in the first time unit, and the number of PSSCH reference symbols in one PRB The overhead of the phase tracking reference signal (PTRS) and/or the channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource, the first time The overhead of the first control information in the frequency resource, and the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource.
  • PTRS phase tracking reference signal
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the PSCCH is used to carry the first control information, which may specifically include the physical layer resource information of the side row data channel, DMRS configuration information, the number of DMRS ports, the modulation and code signal (MCS), and the second control information. Demodulation information such as format.
  • the PSSCH is used to carry data information and second control information.
  • the second control information is mainly used to carry other control information except PSSCH DMRS. Specifically, it may include channel state information (CSI) reporting trigger information, and the purpose of PSSCH User’s IP, PSSCH HARQ process number, new data indicator, HARQ transmission version number and other information.
  • CSI channel state information
  • the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by PTRS and/or CSI-RS.
  • the overhead of the first control information may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the first control information, or the number of REs occupied by the first control information.
  • the overhead of the second control information may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the second control information.
  • the average number of REs respectively occupied by the PTRS and/or CSI-RS, the first control information and the second control information may also be referred to as the number of occupied REs.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols of a PRB in the first time unit may be pre-configured or configured by the network side device.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit may refer to the number of symbols in the first time unit excluding the following symbol overhead: PSCCH symbol overhead, PSFCH symbol overhead, automatic gain control (AGC) symbols, and the last interval (GAP) symbol.
  • the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • the first time-frequency resource is used for The number of REs N RE that transmits data satisfies the following formula (1-3).
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the first time-frequency resource N RE satisfies the following Formula (1-4).
  • N'RE satisfies N'RE represents the number of REs used to transmit data in a PRB in the first time unit; among them, the number of REs used to transmit data in a PRB in the first time unit can also be replaced by the number of REs allocated to PSSCH in a PRB (the number of REs allocated for PSSCH within a PRB). Therefore, the number of REs used to transmit data N RE in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula (1-5).
  • the number of symbols included in the time unit may also be referred to as the symbol length included in the first time unit
  • a represents the symbol overhead in the first time unit, and may include at least one of an AGC symbol, the last GAP symbol, and so on.
  • S203 Determine the TBS of the PSSCH according to the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may be used.
  • the comparison table between the MCS and the target code rate may be as shown in Table 2 below, including the modulation order, target code rate, and spectral efficiency corresponding to different MCS indexes.
  • I MCS represents the MCS index
  • Q m represents the modulation order
  • R represents the target code rate.
  • step S203 the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in step S203 is consistent with the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in the existing NR system.
  • the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in step S203 is consistent with the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in the existing NR system.
  • the method may further include: the sending end sends the transport block according to the TBS.
  • the receiving end receives the transmission block according to the TBS, that is, the receiving end performs channel decoding on the transmission block.
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end may first determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource, and determine the first time according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the frequency resource is the average number of REs occupied by PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations, rather than the actual number of REs occupied by PSSCH DMRS during a single transmission, the PSSCH DMRS overhead is determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead for the initial transmission and retransmission.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is constant, so the TBS determined according to the number of REs used to transmit data are the same. Therefore, the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can realize the combination of the transmission blocks of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process, so as to realize the combination gain.
  • the embodiments of this application may allow the PSSCH to carry different DMRS symbols during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS. quantity.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining the size of a transmission block provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the method can be applied to the sending end and the receiving end.
  • the sending end and the receiving end may be two terminal devices communicating in a D2D manner.
  • the sending end may be called a first terminal device
  • the receiving end may be called a second terminal device.
  • the steps in the method are described in detail below.
  • S301 Determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead in each PRB of the first time-frequency resource, where the first time-frequency resource includes the first time unit in the time domain.
  • the first time-frequency resource is a time-frequency resource used for sidelink communication, and the time-frequency resource may include a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include a first time unit in the time domain, the first time unit may include multiple symbols, and the first time unit may be configured by a network-side device, which may be an access network device or a core network The device, for example, the network side device may configure the first time unit by configuring the first start symbol of the plurality of symbols and the number of the plurality of symbols.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels in the frequency domain. Each sub-channel may include multiple consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain.
  • This one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels may be used by the network side device.
  • Configuration for example, for any subchannel, the network side device can configure the sequence number of the first PRB among the multiple PRBs included in the subchannel and the number of PRBs included in the subchannel to configure the subchannel.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels, and the PSCCH may occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in one sub-channel.
  • the first time unit of the first time-frequency resource in the time domain may include 14 symbols, which are sequentially represented as sym0 to sym13, and the sub-channels occupied in the frequency domain may include 7 PRBs in total.
  • the PSSCH DMRS and the PSCCH can have two situations in the time domain, and the PSSCH DMRS and the PSCCH overlap in the time domain respectively (as shown in (a) in Figure 3). (Shown), and the PSSCH DMRS and PSCCH do not overlap in the time domain (as shown in (b) in Figure 3).
  • the AGC in Figure 3 represents the symbol used for automatic gain control (AGC), and its length can be 1 symbol (as shown in Figure 3) or the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number , Such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • GAP represents the last gap (gap) symbol.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead needs to consider the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration in the PSSCH DRMS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, and also consider the impact of PSCCH on PSSCH DMRS mapping.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time unit in the time domain and the physical resources of the PRB in the frequency domain. Considering that the influence of PSCCH on PSSCH DMRS mapping is different on each PRB, the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS on each PRB may also be different.
  • determining the PSSCH DMRS overhead in each PRB of the first time-frequency resource may include: according to the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, and the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration Whether the DMRS symbol and the PSSCH symbol (that is, the symbol occupied by the PSSCH) overlap in the time domain, determine the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in one PRB of the first time-frequency resource.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to a DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations, and each DMRS configuration is correspondingly set with a certain number of DMRS symbols, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by DMRS or symbols used to transmit DMRS.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource is ⁇ 2, 3, 4 ⁇
  • the DMRS configuration set includes 3 DMRS configurations.
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 2 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 2
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 3 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 3
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 4 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 4.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead of the PRB can be specifically based on the first time
  • the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the frequency resource, the number of DMRS symbols under each DMRS configuration, the number of subcarriers included in one PRB, and the frequency domain density are determined.
  • N represents the number of DMRS configurations in the PSSCH DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource
  • k n represents the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration
  • P represents the DMRS frequency domain density (that is, one RE maps the DMRS in each P RE)
  • P is a positive integer.
  • P can be a constant, for example, P can be equal to 2, 3, 4, etc., and the specific value of P can be set in advance.
  • the 7 DMRS configuration sets in Table 1 and the PSSCH DMRS overhead of the PRB
  • the specific relationship can be as shown in Table 1 above.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in a PRB of the first time-frequency resource can be determined specifically as follows.
  • two PSSCH DMRS configurations are configured in the first time-frequency resource, which are a 2-symbol DMRS configuration and a 3-symbol DMRS configuration, respectively.
  • the first DMRS symbol in the three-symbol DMRS configuration overlaps with the PSCCH in a time domain, and the impact of the PSCCH needs to be considered on the PRB where the PSCCH is located.
  • the overhead of PSSCH DMRS on a PRB may be based on the number of DMRS configurations in the PSSCH DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration, and the DMRS symbols and PSSCH symbols in each DMRS configuration. Whether the time domain overlaps, the number of subcarriers included in a PRB, and the frequency domain density are determined.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead in the PRB satisfies the following formula ( 2-3-1) and (2-3-2):
  • i ranges from 0 to (2-3-1)
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the PRB is satisfied.
  • i ranges from 0 to (2-4)
  • i represents the index of the PRB in the first time-frequency resource
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in each PRB of the first time-frequency resource may be determined according to the number of symbols actually mapped on each PRB of the PSSCH DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource.
  • two DMRS configurations are configured in the first time-frequency resource, which are a DMRS configuration of 2 DMRS symbols and a DMRS configuration of 3 DMRS symbols, respectively.
  • the first DMRS symbol in the DMRS configuration of 3 DMRS symbols overlaps with the PSCCH in the time domain.
  • the number of DMRS symbols mapped in the two DMRS configurations is 2
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead of these 4 PRBs can be determined based on 2 DMRS symbols; on the remaining 3 PRBs that do not overlap with PSCCH in the frequency domain, the number of DMRS symbols mapped in the two PSSCH DMRS configurations is 2 respectively And 3, the overhead of PSSCH DMRS in these 3 PRBs can be determined based on the average value of 2 and 3.
  • N represents the number of DMRS configurations in the PSSCH DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource
  • k n represents the number of DMRS symbols in each DMRS configuration
  • P represents the DMRS frequency domain density (that is, one RE maps the DMRS in each P RE)
  • P is a positive integer.
  • i ranges from 0 to (2-5)
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead on the PRB Meet the following formula (2-6):
  • i ranges from 0 to (2-6)
  • k'n ,i k n -1, the value of i ranges from 0 to (2-7-1)
  • k'n ,i k n , the value of i ranges from 0 to (2-8)
  • S302 Determine the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead of each PRB, and the number of REs used for data transmission is used to determine the TBS of the PSSCH.
  • the data in the RE used for data transmission refers to the data of the transmission block TB, and the data does not include control information, DMRS, and other reference signals (RS).
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the number of REs occupied by data carried in the first time-frequency resource, may also be referred to as the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource, or may refer to the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of REs allocated to the PSSCH channel in a time-frequency resource can also refer to the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource (the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH). The above descriptions are equivalent and Can replace each other.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may be determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead in each PRB.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in one PRB, the number of PSSCH reference symbols of one PRB in the first time unit, and the number of PSSCH reference symbols in one PRB
  • the PSCCH is used to carry the first control information, which may specifically include demodulation information such as physical layer resource information of the side row data channel, DMRS configuration information, the number of DMRS ports, the format of the coded modulation signal (MCS) and the second control information, etc. .
  • the PSSCH is used to carry data information and second control information.
  • the second control information is mainly used to carry other control information except PSSCH DMRS. Specifically, it may include CSI report trigger information, the IP of the target user of the PSSCH, and the PSSCH HARQ process number. Information such as new data indicator and HARQ transmission version number.
  • the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by PTRS and/or CSI-RS
  • the overhead of the first control information may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the first control information, or the first control information.
  • the number of REs occupied by the information, and the overhead of the second control information may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the second control information.
  • the average number of REs respectively occupied by the PTRS and/or CSI-RS, the first control information and the second control information may also be referred to as the number of occupied REs.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols of a PRB in the first time unit may be pre-configured or configured by the network side device.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit may refer to the number of symbols in the first time unit excluding the following symbol overhead: PSCCH symbol overhead, PSFCH symbol overhead, automatic gain control (AGC) symbols, and the last interval (GAP) symbol.
  • the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • the first time-frequency resource is used for The number of REs N RE to transmit data satisfies the following formula (2-9).
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the first time-frequency resource N RE satisfies the following Formula (2-10).
  • N'RE,i represents the number of REs used to transmit data in the i-th PRB in the first time unit.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource N RE satisfies the following formula ( 2-11):
  • the number of symbols included in the time unit may also be referred to as the symbol length included in the first time unit
  • a represents the symbol overhead in the first time unit
  • at least one AGC symbol, the last GAP symbol, etc. may be included.
  • S303 Determine the TBS of the PSSCH according to the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource when the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is determined, the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource and the comparison table between the coded modulation signal (MCS) and the target code rate may be used. Determine the TBS of PSSCH.
  • the comparison table between MCS and target code rate may be as shown in Table 1 above, including the modulation order, target code rate and spectral efficiency corresponding to different MCS indexes.
  • step S303 the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in step S303 is consistent with the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in the existing NR system.
  • the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in step S303 is consistent with the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in the existing NR system.
  • the method may further include: the sending end sends the transport block according to the TBS.
  • the receiving end receives the transmission block according to the TBS, that is, the receiving end performs channel decoding on the transmission block.
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end may first determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead in a PRB in the first time-frequency resource, and determine the first PSSCH DMRS overhead according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the time-frequency resource is the average number of REs occupied by PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations, rather than the actual number of REs occupied by PSSCH DMRS during a single transmission, the PSSCH DMRS overhead is determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead for the initial transmission and retransmission.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data is constant, so the TBS determined according to the number of REs used to transmit data are the same. Therefore, the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can realize the combination of the transmission blocks of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process, so as to realize the combination gain.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission is determined based on the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH and DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations in the first time-frequency resource. Therefore, this embodiment of the application may allow the PSSCH to target one Different numbers of DMRS symbols are carried during the initial transmission and retransmission of the TBS. In addition, by setting different numbers of DMRS symbols, you can increase the number of DMRS symbols when the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) decreases to improve PSSCH decoding efficiency, or reduce the number of DMRS symbols when the SINR increases To improve the PSSCH channel throughput.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining the size of a transmission block provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the method can be applied to the sending end and the receiving end.
  • the sending end and the receiving end may be two terminal devices communicating in a D2D manner.
  • the sending end may be called a first terminal device
  • the receiving end may be called a second terminal device.
  • the steps in the method are described in detail below.
  • S401 Determine the PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource according to the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, and the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under each DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set The second overhead of DMRS.
  • the first time-frequency resource is a time-frequency resource used for sidelink communication
  • the time-frequency resource may include a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include the first time unit in the time domain, the first time unit may include multiple symbols, and the first time unit may be configured by the network-side device. For example, the network-side device may configure these multiple symbols The first starting symbol and the number of these multiple symbols configure the first time unit.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels in the frequency domain. Each sub-channel may include multiple consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain. This one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels may be used by the network side device.
  • the network side device can configure the sequence number of the first PRB among the multiple PRBs included in the subchannel and the number of PRBs included in the subchannel to configure the subchannel.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels
  • the PSCCH may occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in one sub-channel.
  • the PSSCH DMRS and the PSCCH may or may not overlap in the time domain.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource may refer to a DMRS configuration set configured by the network side device or pre-configured to the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the DMRS configuration set may include multiple DMRS configurations, and each DMRS configuration is correspondingly set with a certain number of DMRS symbols, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by DMRS or symbols used to transmit DMRS.
  • the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource is ⁇ 2,3,4 ⁇
  • the DMRS configuration set includes 3 DMRS configurations; where the DMRS configuration is ⁇ 2 ⁇ , which means that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 2; DMRS Configuration ⁇ 3 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 3; DMRS configuration ⁇ 4 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 4.
  • the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under each DMRS configuration.
  • the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource, and specifically may be the average value of the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations.
  • N represents the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the first time-frequency resource
  • the second overhead N DMRS of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource satisfies the following formula (3-1).
  • the method may further include S400: determining the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource under the nth DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set.
  • the first overhead of PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource in the nth DMRS configuration is related to at least one of the following: the number of DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set, the number of DMRS symbols in the nth DMRS configuration, and one PRB The number of subcarriers included in the PSSCH, the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH, and the DMRS frequency domain density.
  • Represents the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource Represents the number of subcarriers included in a PRB
  • k n represents the number of DMRS symbols in the nth DMRS configuration
  • P represents the DMRS frequency domain density (that is, one RE in each P RE maps the DMRS)
  • P is a positive integer.
  • the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource The following formula (3-2) is satisfied; when the PSSCH DMRS and PSCCH overlap in the time domain, the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource The following formula (3-3) is satisfied.
  • P can be a constant, for example, P can be equal to 2, 3, 4, etc., and the specific value of P can be set in advance.
  • the following formula (3-4) is satisfied; when the PSSCH DMRS and PSCCH overlap in the time domain, the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource
  • the following formula (3-5) is satisfied.
  • S402 Determine the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource according to the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the data in the RE used for data transmission refers to the data of the transmission block TB, and the data does not include control information, DMRS, and other reference signals.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the number of REs occupied by data carried in the first time-frequency resource, and may also be referred to as the number of available REs in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource may be determined according to the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is also related to at least one of the following: the number of subcarriers included in a PRB, the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit, and the PTRS and/or PTRS in a PRB Or CSI-RS overhead, the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH in the first time-frequency resource, the overhead of the first control information in the first time-frequency resource, and the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the PSCCH can be used to carry the first control information, and can specifically include demodulation information such as physical layer resource information of the side row data channel, DMRS configuration information, the number of DMRS ports, the format of MCS and the second control information.
  • the PSSCH can be used to carry data information and second control information.
  • the second control information is mainly used to carry other control information besides the PSSCH DMRS. Specifically, it can include CSI report trigger information, the IP of the target user of the PSSCH, and the PSSCH HARQ process number. Information such as new data indicator and HARQ transmission version number.
  • the overhead of PTRS and/or CSI-RS may refer to the average number of REs occupied by PTRS and/or CSI-RS.
  • the overhead of the first control information may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the first control information, or the number of REs occupied by the first control information.
  • the overhead of the second control information may refer to the average number of REs occupied by the second control information.
  • the average number of REs respectively occupied by the PTRS and/or CSI-RS, the first control information and the second control information may also be referred to as the number of occupied REs.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit may be pre-configured or configured by the network side device.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols in the first time unit may refer to the number of symbols in the first time unit excluding the following symbols: PSCCH symbols, PSFCH symbols, automatic gain control (AGC) symbols, and last gap (GAP) symbols .
  • the AGC symbols in the first time unit are the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • N RE of the data satisfies the following formula (3-6).
  • the N RE in the formula (3-7) satisfies the above formula (1-3).
  • the number of symbols included in the time unit may also be referred to as the symbol length included in the first time unit)
  • a represents the symbol overhead in the first time unit, and may include at least one of an AGC symbol, the last GAP symbol, and so on.
  • S403 Determine the TBS of the PSSCH according to the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource when the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource is determined, the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource and the comparison table between the coded modulation signal (MCS) and the target code rate may be used. Determine the TBS of PSSCH.
  • the comparison table between MCS and target code rate may be as shown in Table 1 below, including the modulation order, target code rate and spectral efficiency corresponding to different MCS indexes.
  • step S403 the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in step S403 is consistent with the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in the existing NR system.
  • the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in step S403 is consistent with the method of determining the TBS of the PSSCH in the existing NR system.
  • the method may further include: the sending end sends the transport block according to the TBS.
  • the receiving end receives the transmission block according to the TBS, that is, the receiving end performs channel decoding on the transmission block.
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end may first determine the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource, and determine the first overhead according to the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the number of REs used to transmit data in the time-frequency resource Since the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS is the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations, rather than the actual number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS during a single transmission, the PSSCH DMRS The number of REs used to transmit data determined by the second overhead is unchanged, and thus the TBS determined according to the number of REs used to transmit data are the same. Therefore, the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can realize the combination of the transmission blocks of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process, so as to realize the combination gain.
  • the number of REs used for data transmission is determined based on the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH and DMRS under multiple DMRS configurations in the first time-frequency resource. Therefore, this embodiment of the application may allow the PSSCH to target one Different numbers of DMRS symbols are carried during the initial transmission and retransmission of the TBS. In addition, by setting different numbers of DMRS symbols, you can increase the number of DMRS symbols when the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR) decreases to improve PSSCH decoding efficiency, or reduce the number of DMRS symbols when the SINR increases To improve the PSSCH channel throughput.
  • SINR signal to interference plus noise ratio
  • the scheme provided in Figure 2 to Figure 5 above supports DMRS configurations with different numbers of DMRS symbols in the initial transmission and repeated transmission of a data packet, so as to ensure that if the channel status changes during the initial transmission and retransmission of the data ,
  • the accuracy of channel estimation can be improved by increasing the time domain density of the demodulation reference signal, thereby ensuring the guarantee of transmission reliability.
  • the number of DMRS symbols is variable, the number of REs allocated to the PSSCH can still remain unchanged, and the size of the data transmission block for the initial transmission and retransmission can be ensured.
  • the physical layer of multiple transmissions is combined to obtain a transmission combined gain.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of another method for determining the size of a transmission block provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the method can be applied to a communication system including a sending end and a receiving end.
  • the sending end and the receiving end may be two communicating through D2D
  • the terminal device for example, the sending end may be called the first terminal device, and the receiving end may be called the second terminal device.
  • the steps in the method are described in detail below.
  • the first terminal device sends first indication information and/or second indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate an expansion factor of the second control information, and the second indication information is used to indicate PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the second terminal device receives the first indication information and/or the second indication information from the first terminal device, the first indication information is used to indicate the adjustment factor of the second control information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS Overhead.
  • the PSSCH can be used to carry data information and second control information.
  • the second control information is mainly used to carry other control information besides PSSCH DMRS. Specifically, it can include CSI report trigger information and the target user of PSSCH. IP, PSSCH HARQ process number, new data indicator, HARQ transmission version number and other information.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information indicated by the first indication information may be used to determine the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the overhead of the second control information may specifically refer to the number of REs occupied by the second control information in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead indicated by the second indication information may specifically refer to the PSSCH DMRS overhead in the first time-frequency resource, that is, the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource is a time-frequency resource used for sidelink communication
  • the time-frequency resource may include a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include the first time unit in the time domain, the first time unit may include multiple symbols, and the first time unit may be configured by the network-side device. For example, the network-side device may configure these multiple symbols The first starting symbol and the number of these multiple symbols configure the first time unit.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels in the frequency domain. Each sub-channel may include multiple consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain. This one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels may be used by the network side device.
  • the network side device can configure the sequence number of the first PRB among the multiple PRBs included in the subchannel and the number of PRBs included in the subchannel to configure the subchannel.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels
  • the PSCCH may occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in one sub-channel.
  • PSSCH, DMRS and PSCCH may or may not overlap in the time domain.
  • the first indication information may be carried in the first control information, and the second indication information may also be carried in the first control information, and the first control information is control information carried by the PSCCH.
  • the first indication information may occupy at least one bit of the first control information.
  • the first indication information may be 1 bit or 2 bits.
  • the second indication information may also occupy at least one bit of the first control information.
  • the second indication information may be 1 bit or 2 bits.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the number of bits occupied by the first indication information and the second indication information.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may also be carried by RRC. When there is only one DMRS time domain pattern configuration in the PSSCH DMRS configuration set, the second indication information may not exist.
  • the instructions for the first indication information and the second indication information are respectively introduced and explained below.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information indicated by the first indication letter is equal to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information, which can also be understood as: To indicate that the overhead of the second control information is determined according to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information; further, the first indication letter indication may also be used to indicate that the adjustment factors carried in the first control information of the initial transmission and the retransmission are the same.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information indicated by the first indication letter is equal to the average value of at least one configured adjustment factor It can also be understood as: the first indication information is used to indicate the average value of at least one adjustment factor according to the configuration. The overhead of the second control information is determined; further, the first indication letter indication may also be used to indicate that the adjustment factors carried in the first control information of the initial transmission and the retransmission are different.
  • the at least one adjustment factor may include one or more adjustment factors, and the at least one adjustment factor may be configured or pre-configured by the network side device.
  • the at least one adjustment factor may include four adjustment factors, which are expressed as ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 , average It can be the average of these four adjustment factors (i.e. ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 ).
  • the first indication information is 1 bit: when the value of this 1 bit is 0, the adjustment factors carried by the first control information that can be used to indicate the initial transmission and retransmission are the same, and the second indication information indicated by the first indication information is the same.
  • the adjustment factor of the control information is equal to the adjustment factor ⁇ carried in the first control information; when the value of this 1 bit is 1, the adjustment factors carried by the first control information that can be used to indicate the initial transmission and the retransmission are different, and the first indication information
  • the indicated adjustment factor of the second control information is equal to the average value of at least one adjustment factor vice versa.
  • the average It can be the ratio of the sum of at least one adjustment factor to the number of at least one adjustment factor; or, the average value It can be obtained by rounding up the ratio; or, the average value It can be obtained by rounding down the ratio.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
  • the first indication information is the adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information, that is, the first indication information is used to explicitly indicate the adjustment of the second control information
  • the factor ⁇ ' the first indication information may specifically be an index value of the adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information.
  • ⁇ ' is a positive integer
  • ⁇ ' can be any one of the set of adjustment factors corresponding to the configured second control information; or, ⁇ 'is greater than or equal to the minimum value in the set of adjustment factors and less than or equal to The maximum value in the set of adjustment factors.
  • the adjustment factor set may be configured or pre-configured by the network side device, and the adjustment factor set may include at least two adjustment factors.
  • the adjustment factor set may include four adjustment factors, and may specifically be ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 ⁇ .
  • the set of adjustment factors is ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 ⁇ , if the index values corresponding to these four adjustment factors are 00, 01, 10, and 11. Then: when the value of the 2 bits is 00, the first indication information is specifically used to indicate that the adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information is ⁇ 1 ; when the value of the 2 bits is 01, the first indication information is specifically The adjustment factor ⁇ ′ used to indicate the second control information is ⁇ 2 ; when the 2-bit value is 10, the first indication information is specifically used to indicate the adjustment factor ⁇ ′ of the second control information is ⁇ 3 ; When the value of the bit is 11, the first indication information is specifically used to indicate that the adjustment factor ⁇ ′ of the second control information is ⁇ 4 .
  • the minimum value in the set of adjustment factors ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 ⁇ is ⁇ 1 and the maximum value is ⁇ 4
  • the minimum value ⁇ 1 to the maximum value ⁇ 4 includes a total of 6 positive integers.
  • These 6 positive integers can respectively correspond to a 3-bit index value.
  • the index values corresponding to these 6 positive integers can be 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, and 110 in sequence, then
  • the first indication information may indicate the corresponding positive integer as the adjustment factor ⁇ 'of the second control information through different index values.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the number of DMRS symbols carried in the first control information; or, the second indication information is used to indicate The PSSCH DMRS overhead (also called the second overhead) determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead (also called the first overhead or the average number of occupied REs) under at least one DMRS configuration, and the second overhead may be multiple first overheads. An average cost).
  • the second indication information is 1 bit.
  • the value of the 1 bit is 0, it can be used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the number of DMRS symbols carried in the first control information.
  • the value of the 1 bit is 0 At 1 time, it can be used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead under at least one DMRS configuration.
  • the at least one DMRS configuration may refer to at least one DMRS configuration corresponding to the first time-frequency resource, and may be configured by a network side device or pre-configured to the first time-frequency resource.
  • the at least one DMRS configuration may include one or more DMRS configurations, and each DMRS configuration is correspondingly set with a certain number of DMRS symbols, and the DMRS symbols may refer to symbols occupied by DMRS or symbols used to transmit DMRS. For example, if at least one DMRS configuration is ⁇ 2, 3, 4 ⁇ , then at least one DMRS configuration includes 3 DMRS configurations.
  • DMRS configuration ⁇ 2 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 2; DMRS configuration ⁇ 3 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 3; DMRS configuration ⁇ 4 ⁇ indicates that the number of corresponding DMRS symbols is 4.
  • the overhead of PSSCH DMRS under each DMRS configuration may be referred to as the first overhead of PSSCH DMRS
  • the overhead of PSSCH DMRS determined according to the overhead of PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration may be referred to as the second overhead of PSSCH DMRS.
  • the second overhead of the PSSCH DMRS may refer to an average value of the first overhead of the PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration.
  • S503 The first terminal device determines the TBS of the PSSCH according to the adjustment factor of the second control information and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead. Among them, S503 is located after S501 and in no particular order with S502, that is, S503 may be located after S502 or before S502. In FIG. 6, S503 is located after S502 as an example for illustration.
  • the first terminal device may determine the value of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource according to the adjustment factor of the second control information indicated in the first indication information. Overhead. And/or, when the first terminal device sends the second indication information to the second terminal device, the first terminal device may determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead indicated in the second indication information. After that, the first terminal device may determine the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource according to the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource and/or the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource , So as to determine the TBS of the PSSCH according to the number of REs used to transmit data.
  • S504 The second terminal device determines the TBS of the PSSCH according to the adjustment factor of the second control information and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead. Among them, S504 is located after S502 and in no particular order with S503, that is, S504 may be located after S503 or before S503. In FIG. 6, S504 is located after S503 as an example for illustration.
  • the second terminal device may determine the adjustment factor of the second control information according to the first indication information, and determine the second in the first time-frequency resource according to the adjustment factor of the second control information. Control the overhead of information.
  • the second terminal device may determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead indicated by the second indication information according to the second indication information, that is, the PSSCH DMRS overhead in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the second terminal device may determine the number of REs used for data transmission in the first time-frequency resource according to the overhead of the second control information in the first time-frequency resource and/or the overhead of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource , So as to determine the TBS of the PSSCH according to the number of REs used to transmit data.
  • the method may further include: the first terminal device sends a transmission block according to the TBS.
  • the second terminal device receives the transmission block according to the TBS, that is, the second terminal device performs channel decoding on the transmission block.
  • the PSSCH initial transmission and retransmission are supported.
  • Various configurations are used flexibly during the process.
  • this method can ensure that the transmitting end and the receiving end ensure that the determined second control information overhead and/or the PSSCH DMRS overhead are the same when determining the TBS, thereby ensuring that the TBS determined by the transmitting end and the receiving end are consistent .
  • the second indication information is used to indicate the PSSCH DMRS overhead determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead under at least one DMRS configuration
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead is the average number of REs occupied by the PSSCH DMRS under at least one DMRS configuration
  • the TBS determined according to the PSSCH DMRS overhead is the same. Therefore, the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can realize the combination of the transmission blocks of the initial transmission and the retransmission in the side link communication process, so as to realize the combination gain.
  • the embodiments of this application may allow the PSSCH to carry different DMRS symbols during the initial transmission and retransmission of a TBS. quantity.
  • the number of DMRS symbols can be increased when the signal-to-interference plus noise ratio (SINR) is reduced to improve PSSCH decoding efficiency, or the number of DMRS symbols can be reduced when the SINR is increased to improve PSSCH channel throughput.
  • SINR signal-to-interference plus noise ratio
  • the technical solution provided in Figure 6 above supports the sending end to inform the receiving end of the method for determining the PSSCH DMRS overhead through the first control information or RRC configuration information, that is, the PSSCH DMRS overhead is determined by the number of REs used in this DMRS, or according to the de-DMRS All DMRS configurations in the configuration set are determined.
  • This provides the transmitter with a degree of freedom in choosing PSSCH and DMRS overhead.
  • different DMRS configurations may be configured on a resource pool to ensure decoding reliability.
  • the PSSCH DMRS overhead can be fixed at a small value (for example, a DMRS configuration containing two DMRS symbols).
  • the PSSCH DMRS configuration is determined according to all the DMRS configurations in the DMRS configuration set
  • the overhead will cause the number of REs actually allocated to the PSSCH to be low.
  • This application supports a method for the sender to determine the PSSCH DMRS overhead by notifying the receiving end, so as to provide the sender with a degree of freedom to select the PSSCH DMRS overhead.
  • the adjustment factor of the second control information in the PSSCH will have multiple configurations.
  • the specific sender indicates the specific adjustment factor used by the second control information in the first control information carried in one data transmission.
  • the adjustment factor value of the second control information carried in the first control information can be adjusted according to the channel state.
  • the channel condition becomes worse increase the value of the adjustment factor, so that the transmission code rate of the second control information is reduced, and the transmission reliability of the second control information is improved; when the channel condition becomes better, the adjustment factor is reduced
  • the value of reduces the number of REs occupied by the second control information, and achieves the purpose of increasing the number of REs occupied by the PSSCH, thereby increasing the system throughput.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining a PSSCH DMRS symbol provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the method can be applied to the transmitting end and the receiving end.
  • the sending end and the receiving end may be two terminal devices communicating in a D2D manner.
  • the sending end may be called a first terminal device, and the receiving end may be called a second terminal device.
  • the steps in the method are described in detail below.
  • S601 Determine the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource according to the number of PSSCH DMRS DMRS symbols in the first time-frequency resource and the number of PSSCH reference symbols.
  • the first time-frequency resource is a time-frequency resource used for sidelink communication
  • the time-frequency resource may include a time domain resource and a frequency domain resource.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include the first time unit in the time domain, the first time unit may include multiple symbols, and the first time unit may be configured by the network-side device. For example, the network-side device may configure these multiple symbols The first starting symbol and the number of these multiple symbols configure the first time unit.
  • the first time-frequency resource may include one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels in the frequency domain. Each sub-channel may include multiple consecutive PRBs in the frequency domain. This one sub-channel or consecutive multiple sub-channels may be used by the network side device.
  • the network side device can configure the sequence number of the first PRB among the multiple PRBs included in the subchannel and the number of PRBs included in the subchannel to configure the subchannel.
  • the PSSCH and the PSSCH DMRS may occupy the above-mentioned one sub-channel or multiple consecutive sub-channels
  • the PSCCH may occupy multiple consecutive PRBs in one sub-channel.
  • PSSCH, DMRS and PSCCH may or may not overlap in the time domain.
  • the number of DMRS symbols of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource may refer to the number of symbols occupied by the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource, or the number of symbols used to map the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource.
  • the number of DMRS symbols can be configured or pre-configured by the network side device, and the first terminal device carries the number of DMRS symbols used in this data transmission in the first control information, for example, the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource
  • the number of DMRS symbols may be 2, 3, 4, etc., which is not specifically limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the number of reference symbols may be the number of symbols in the first time unit excluding the following symbol overhead, that is, the number of symbols contained in the first time unit minus the number of symbols of the following symbol overhead: PSCCH symbol overhead, PSFCH symbol overhead Symbol overhead, AGC symbol overhead, the last GAP symbol overhead in the first time unit.
  • the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • the number of symbols included in the above-mentioned first time unit may be configured by the network side device or configured with it.
  • the symbol overhead of the PSCCH can also be configured or configured by the network side device.
  • the number of reference symbols may be configured or pre-configured by the network side device.
  • the number of reference symbols may be pre-configured in the resource pool where the first time-frequency resource is located.
  • the number of reference symbols is determined by the first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes at least one of the following: the number of symbols included in the first time unit, the feedback configuration period information of the PSFCH, the number of symbols included in the PSFCH and the guard interval of the PSFCH, The relationship between the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH and the number of PRBs included in the PSCCH.
  • the relationship between the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH and the number of PRBs included in the PSCCH may specifically include: the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH and the number of PRBs included in the PSCCH are equal or not equal.
  • the relationship between the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH and the number of PRBs included in the PSCCH can also be understood as the relationship between the PSSCH bandwidth and the PSCCH bandwidth, that is, the PSSCH bandwidth and the PSCCH bandwidth are equal or not equal.
  • the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is not equal to the number of PRBs included in the PSCCH, if Indicates the number of GAP symbols and/or AGC symbols in the last interval excluded in the first time unit, Represents the symbol overhead of PSFCH, the number of reference symbols The following formula (3-1) is satisfied.
  • the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • the number of reference symbols is affected by the symbol overhead of the PSFCH.
  • the symbol overhead of the PSFCH here refers to the total guard interval of the PSFCH and PSFCH. The number of symbols occupied.
  • the relative position of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit is determined according to the following Table 3
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot is in, Indicates the start symbol position of the first time unit.
  • the above-mentioned relative position of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit may refer to the symbol position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS relative to the start symbol position on the first time unit.
  • Table 3 is a relative position of the PSSCH DMRS symbol on the first time unit provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • Table 3 in symbols represents the number of PSSCH reference symbols, DM-RS positon Indicates the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit.
  • PSCCH duration 2 symbols indicates that the symbol overhead of PSCCH is 2 symbols
  • PSCCH duration 3 symbols indicates that the symbol overhead of PSCCH is 3 symbols
  • Number of PSSCH DM- RS represents the symbol overhead of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the first time unit includes 14 symbols, that is, the first time unit includes symbols from sym0 to sym13 in a time slot.
  • the PSFCH configuration period W is 0, that is, the frame structure of all side links is shown in Figure 8 (a)
  • the number of reference symbols is excluded in the first time unit
  • the last interval symbol and the number of Y symbols of the AGC, where Y 1. According to the above parameters, the number of reference symbols can be determined Is 12.
  • the relative position are 3 and 8; when the number of time-domain symbols of the PSSCH DMRS indicated in the first control information is 3, the relative position For 1, 4, 7. Since the first time unit of the side link occupies all 14 symbols of the time slot, the configured start symbol position Is 0.
  • the relative position 3 and 8 namely the symbol mapping position of PSSCH DMRS in a time slot It is sym3 and sym8. It should be noted that the number of AGC symbols may be one or more, and one AGC symbol is taken as an example for illustration in FIG. 8.
  • the AGC symbol is the first Y symbols in the first time unit, and Y is a natural number, such as 1, 2 or 3.
  • the number of PRBs included in the PSSCH is equal to the number of PRBs included in the PSCCH
  • the number of reference symbols is affected by the symbol overhead of the PSFCH and the symbol overhead of the PSCCH.
  • the number of PSCCH symbols and the number of PSSCH DMRS symbols used in this data transmission are carried in the first control information, and the relative position of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit is determined according to Table 3 above Finally, it is determined that the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a slot is in, Indicates the start symbol position of the first time unit.
  • the above-mentioned relative position of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit may refer to the symbol position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS relative to the start symbol position on the first time unit.
  • the first time unit includes 14 symbols, that is, includes symbols from sym0 to sym13 in a time slot.
  • the PSFCH configuration period W is 0, that is, the frame structure of all side links is shown in Figure 9 (a)
  • the symbol overhead of the PSFCH is 0, and when the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 2, the reference symbol
  • the number of PSCCH symbols is 2, the relative position 1 and 5, that is, the symbol mapping position of PSSCH DMRS in a time slot It is sym3 and sym8. It should be noted that the number of AGC symbols may be one or more. In FIG. 9, one AGC symbol is taken as an example for illustration.
  • the PSSCH DMRS when the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS exceeds the included symbol of the PSSCH, the PSSCH DMRS is not mapped to the excess symbol mapping position.
  • the PSFCH configuration period W is 4, that is, the symbol overhead of the PSFCH is
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols on the side link as shown in (a) and (b) in Figure 8 is the last interval symbol and Y AGC symbols excluded in the first time unit
  • the number of reference symbols is determined to be 11.
  • the relative position It is 1, 4, 7, 11.
  • the configured start symbol position 0 that is, the symbol mapping position of PSSCH DMRS in a slot
  • PSSCH DMRS can be mapped on sym1, sym4, sym7, and sym11; but for the time slot shown in Figure 8(b), PSSCH DMRS can be mapped on On sym1, sym4, and sym7, but because the PSFCH occupies some symbols, no more PSSCH DMRS can be mapped on sym11. Therefore, the PSSCH DMRS is not mapped on sym11, or the PSSCH DMRS of sym11 is deleted, or the PSSCH DMRS of sym11 is no longer mapped.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in the first time-frequency resource is also related to the symbol overhead of the PSCCH.
  • the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 2, that is, the PSCCH occupies 2 symbols in the first time unit; or, the symbol overhead of the PSCCH is 3, that is, the PSCCH occupies 3 symbols in the first time unit.
  • both the transmitting end and the receiving end can determine whether the PSSCH DMRS is in the first time-frequency resource according to the number of DMRS symbols of the PSSCH DMRS and the number of reference symbols of the PSSCH.
  • the symbol mapping position in the first time-frequency resource so that the transmitting end and the receiving end can quickly and efficiently determine the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS in a time slot can be determined by the start symbol position of the first time unit and the relative position of the DMRS symbol of the PSSCH DMRS on the first time unit, so that the PSSCH DMRS can be The symbol mapping position in a time slot starts from the first symbol position, thereby greatly improving the decoding efficiency.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS is determined by the total number of symbols included in the PSSCH and PSCCH, which causes two problems.
  • the first problem is that when the PSSCH and PSCCH contain the same number of PRBs, the PSSCH DMRS symbol mapping determined by the total number of symbols of the PSSCH and PSCCH cannot work; the second problem is that due to the existence of the PSFCH channel, the first time unit is different.
  • the symbol mapping position of the PSSCH DMRS is determined according to the number of reference symbols of the PSSCH.
  • the number of PSSCH reference symbols defined in this application is the number of symbols included in the first time unit to exclude PSFCH occupation
  • the influence of the number of symbols in the first time unit is excluded, and the influence of the AGC symbol and the last GAP symbol in the first time unit is excluded.
  • the influence of the PSCCH is excluded, and the parameters are determined.
  • the existing PSSCH DMRS time domain pattern configuration table can work when the PSSCH and PSCCH bandwidths are the same, and on the other hand, it can ensure that the usage scenarios of the number of symbols included in the PSSCH DMRS time domain pattern are not affected by the presence of PSFCH.
  • a terminal device for example, a first terminal device or a second terminal device
  • a terminal device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • this application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiment of the present application may divide the terminal device into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 10 shows a possible structural schematic diagram of the transmission block size determination device involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device can be used as a terminal device or a chip built in the terminal device.
  • the device may be the first terminal device or the second terminal device.
  • the device includes: a processing unit 701. Further, the device further includes a sending unit 702 and a receiving unit 703.
  • the processing unit 701 may be used to support the device to execute S201, S202, and S203 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the second terminal device or the network side device.
  • the sending unit 702 can be used to support the The device sends the transmission block to the second terminal device according to the TBS determined in S203; when the device is the second terminal device or a chip built into the second terminal device, the receiving unit 703 can be used to support the device to receive data from the first terminal device or the network.
  • the information of the side device for example, the receiving unit 703 can be used to support the device to receive the transmission block from the first terminal device according to the TBS determined in S203, and the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the second terminal device or the network side device .
  • the processing unit 701 may be used to support the device to execute S301, S302, and S303 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the second terminal device or the network side device, for example, according to the TBS determined in S303 to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device sends the transmission block; when the device is a second terminal device or a chip built into the second terminal device, the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the first terminal device or the network side device, and the receiving unit 703 can be used In order to support the apparatus to receive information from the first terminal device or the network side device, for example, the receiving unit 703 may be configured to support the apparatus to receive the transmission block from the first terminal device according to the TBS determined in S303.
  • the processing unit 701 may be used to support the device to execute S400, S401, S402, and S403 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the second terminal device or the network side device, for example, according to the TBS determined in S403 to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device sends the transmission block; when the device is a second terminal device or a chip built into the second terminal device, the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the first terminal device or the network side device, and the receiving unit 703 can be used In order to support the apparatus to receive information from the first terminal device or the network side device, for example, the receiving unit 703 may be configured to support the apparatus to receive the transmission block from the first terminal device according to the TBS determined in S403.
  • the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to execute S501 in the foregoing method embodiment, and the processing unit 701 can be used to The device is supported to perform S503 in the above method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein; further, the sending unit 702 can also be used to send the transmission block to the second terminal device according to the TBS determined in S503 .
  • the receiving unit 703 can be used to support the device to perform S502 in the above method embodiment, and the processing unit 701 can be used to support the device to perform the above method embodiment. S504, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein; further, the receiving unit 703 may also be configured to receive the transmission block sent from the first terminal device according to the TBS determined in S504.
  • the processing unit 701 may be used to support the device to execute S601 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the sending unit 702 can be used to support the device to send information to the second terminal device or the network side device
  • the receiving unit 703 can be used to support the device to receive information.
  • Information from the second terminal device or network side device when the device is the second terminal device or a chip built into the second terminal device, the receiving unit 703 can be used to support the device to receive information from the first terminal device or network side device
  • the sending unit 702 may be used to support the apparatus to send information to the first terminal device or the network side device.
  • the processing unit 701 in this embodiment of the application may be the processor of the device, the sending unit 702 may be the transmitter of the device, and the receiving unit 703 may be the receiver of the device.
  • the transmitter is usually It can be integrated with the receiver and used as a transceiver, and the specific transceiver can also be called a communication interface.
  • the device can be used as a terminal device or a chip built into the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can It is the first terminal device or the second terminal device.
  • the device includes a processor 801, and may also include a memory 802, a communication interface 803, and a bus 804.
  • the processor 801, the memory 802, and the communication interface 803 are connected by the bus 804.
  • the processor 801 is used to control and manage the actions of the device.
  • the processor 801 may be used to support the device to execute S201, S202, and S203 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the processor 801 may be used to support the device to execute S301, S302, and S303 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the processor 801 may be used to support the device to execute S400, S401, S402, and S403 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes used in the technology described herein.
  • the processor 801 when the device is the first terminal device or a chip built in the first terminal device, the processor 801 may be used to support the device to execute S503 in the foregoing method embodiment; when the device is the first terminal device When the second terminal device or the second terminal device has a built-in chip, the processor 801 may be used to support the device to execute S504 in the foregoing method embodiment. In another possible implementation manner, the processor 801 may be used to support the device to execute S601 in the foregoing method embodiment, and/or other processes of the technology described herein.
  • the communication interface 803 is used to support the device to communicate.
  • the communication interface 803 may be used to support the device to communicate with the network side device or the second terminal device.
  • the communication interface 803 may be used to support the device to communicate with the network side device or the first terminal device.
  • the memory 802 is used to store the program code and data of the device.
  • the processor 801 may be a central processing unit, a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof . It can implement or execute various exemplary logical blocks, modules, and circuits described in conjunction with the disclosure of this application.
  • the processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, for example, a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, and so on.
  • the bus 804 in FIG. 11 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect standard
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on.
  • FIG. 11 is only represented by a thick line, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes a network device, a first terminal device, and a second terminal device; wherein, the first terminal device is the transmission block size provided in FIG. 10 or FIG. 11 above.
  • the determining device is used to perform the steps of the first terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6 or FIG. 7; the second terminal device is the transmission provided by the foregoing FIG. 10 or FIG. 11
  • the block size determining device is configured to execute the steps of the second terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 5, FIG. 6 or FIG. 7.
  • the disclosed device and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, for example, multiple units or components may be divided. It can be combined or integrated into another device, or some features can be omitted or not implemented.
  • the units described as separate parts may or may not be physically separate.
  • the parts displayed as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple different places. . Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a readable storage medium.
  • the readable storage medium may include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only Various media that can store program codes such as memory, random access memory, magnetic disk or optical disk.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions run on a device, the device executes the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2 Steps in.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions run on a device, the device executes the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4 Steps in.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions, and when the instructions run on a device, the device executes the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 Steps in.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions. When the instructions run on a device, the device executes the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 The steps in the first terminal device. In yet another aspect of the present application, a computer-readable storage medium is provided. The computer-readable storage medium stores instructions. When the instructions run on a device, the device executes the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 Steps in the second terminal device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores instructions. When the instructions run on a device, the device executes the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7 Steps in.
  • a computer program product is provided.
  • the computer program product runs on a device, the device executes the steps in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • a computer program product is provided.
  • the computer program product runs on a device, the device executes the steps in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • a computer program product is provided.
  • the computer program product runs on a device, the device executes the steps in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • a computer program product is provided.
  • the device executes the steps of the first terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6.
  • a computer program product is provided, which when the computer program product runs on a device, causes the device to execute the steps of the second terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 6 above.
  • a computer program product is provided.
  • the computer program product runs on a device, the device executes the steps in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 7.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置，可以应用于车联网、V2X、V2V等系统中，该方法包括：确定第一时频资源的一个物理资源块PRB中侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销，所述第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；根据所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定所述第一时频资源中用于传输数据的资源元素RE数量，所述用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定侧行数据信道PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。该方案能够实现同一传输块多次传输的合并增益，且对于一个传输块的初传和重传中支持不同DMRS符号数量的DMRS配置，这样在信道状态发生变化时，可以通过调整DMRS符号数量来提高信道估计的准确性，进而保证传输块的传输可靠性。

Description

一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置
本申请要求于2020年04月10日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202010281605.8、申请名称为“一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及车联网技术领域，尤其涉及一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置。
背景技术
在通信系统中，数据被组织成传输块(transport block，TB)来进行传输。在传输TB之前，首先要基于用于传输数据的资源元素(resource element，RE)的数量，确定传输块尺寸(transport block size，TBS)。
当前标准中定义了如何确定用于空口传输的数据的RE数量。然而，在车与任何事物(vehicle to everything，V2X)场景中，由于帧结构与空口帧结构不同，当前标准中定义的方法不再适用。因此，需要针对V2X场景提供一种传输块尺寸确定方法。
发明内容
本申请提供一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置，可以应用于车联网，例如车与任何事物(vehicle to everything，V2X)通信、车间通信长期演进技术(long term evolution-vehicle，LTE-V)、车辆与车辆(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)通信等，或可以用于智能驾驶，智能网联车等领域，该方案能够实现同一传输块多次传输的合并增益，且对于一个传输块的初传和重传中支持不同DMRS符号数量的DMRS配置，这样在信道状态发生变化时，可以通过调整DMRS符号数量，来提高信道估计的准确性，从而保证传输块的传输可靠性。
第一方面，提供了一种传输块尺寸确定方法，该方法可以应用于V2X的发送端，也可以应用于V2X的接收端，该方法包括：确定第一时频资源的一个物理资源块PRB中侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元，在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB；根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的资源元素RE数量，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量也可以替换为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量或者第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量；其中，该用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。
上述技术方案中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以先确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，并根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。由于该PSSCH DMRS的开销为多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量，而不是单次传输时PSSCH DMRS占用的实际RE数量，所以针对于初传和重传，根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量是不变的，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定的TBS是相同的，从 而可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。另外，本方案在确定TBS时，是根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量，这样可确保在一个传输块的初传和重传的过程中如果信道状态发生变换时，可以通过增加DMRS符号数量，从而提高信道估计准确性，进而确保传输可靠性保证；同时，在信道状态较好的情况下，可以通过减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH的吞吐量。
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销为占用的平均RE数量；其中，第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在时域上为第一时间单元、频域上为一个PRB的物理资源中占用的平均RE数量。
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，包括：根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销。其中，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合，该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。上述可能的实现方式中，可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量；同时，通过设置不同的DMRS符号数量，这样在信道状态较差或SINR降低时增加DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH译码效率，或者在SINR提升时减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH吞吐量。
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS的开销满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000001
表示该PSSCH DMRS的开销，N表示第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，k n表示每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000002
表示一个PRB中包括的子载波数量，P表示DMRS频域密度，P为正整数；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000003
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个PRB包括的子载波数量，一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中相位追踪参考信号PTRS和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的开销，该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。上述可能的实现方式中，通过考虑上述多个不同的参数，可以在确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量时，提高用于传输数据的RE数量的准确性。
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，N RE表示第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000004
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000005
表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000006
表示一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销，x表示一个PRB中PTRS 和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000007
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000008
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000009
N RE表示第一时频资源用于传输数据的RE数量，Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000010
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000011
表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000012
表示一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000013
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中所述第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000014
上述两种可能的实现方式中，均能够在PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH有时域重叠或者无时域重叠时，唯一确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，即唯一确定传输块的TBS，从而实现同一传输块的多次传输的合并增益。
可选地，在该方法应用于发送端的场景下，该方法还可以包括：根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；发送该传输块。在该方法应用于接收端的场景下，该方法还可以包括：根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；接收该传输块。上述可能的实现方式中，针对于初传和重传，该用于传输数据的RE数量是根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的，且针对于初传和重传是不变的，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定的TBS是相同的，从而可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
第二方面，提供了一种传输块尺寸确定装置，该装置可以应用于V2X的发送端，也可以应用于V2X的接收端，该装置包括：处理单元，用于确定第一时频资源的一个物理资源块PRB中侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；处理单元，还用于根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的资源元素RE数量，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量也可以替换为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量或者第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量；其中，该用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销为占用的平均RE数量；其中，第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在时域上为第一时间单元、频域上为一个PRB的物理资源中占用的平均RE数量。
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元还用于：根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销。其中，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合，该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS的开销满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000015
表示该PSSCH DMRS的开销，N表示第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，k n表示每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000016
表示一个PRB中包括的子载波数量，P表示DMRS频域密度，P为正整数；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000017
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个PRB包括的子载波数量，一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中相位追踪参考信号PTRS和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的开销，该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，N RE表示第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000018
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000019
表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000020
表示一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000021
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000022
在第二方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000023
N RE表示第一时频资源用于传输数据的RE数量，Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000024
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000025
表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000026
表示一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000027
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中所述第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000028
可选地，在该装置应用于发送端的场景下，该装置还包括发送单元；处理单元，还用于根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；发送单元，用于发送该传输块。在该装置应用于接收端的场景下，该装置还包括接收单元；处理单元，还用于根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；接收单元，还用于接收该传输块。
第三方面，提供一种传输块尺寸确定方法，该方法可以应用于V2X的发送端，也可以应用于V2X的接收端，该方法包括：根据第一时频资源对应的解调参考信号DMRS配置集合的DMRS配置数量，以及该DMRS配置集合内每个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的第一开销，确定第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量也可以替换为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量或者第一 时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量；其中，该用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。
上述技术方案中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以先确定第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，并根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。由于该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销为多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量，而不是单次传输时PSSCH DMRS占用的实际RE数量，所以针对于初传和重传，根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量是不变的，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定的TBS是相同的，从而可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。此外，该方案在确定TBS时，是根据第一时频资源中多个DMRS配置下该PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量，这样可确保在一个传输块的初传和重传的过程中如果信道状态发生变换时，可以通过增加DMRS符号数量，从而提高信道估计准确性，进而确保传输可靠性保证；同时，在信道状态较好的情况下，可以通过减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH的吞吐量。
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销为占用的平均RE数量。其中，第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销可以是指每个DMRS配置下该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量；该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，具体可以是多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS的第一开销的平均值。
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销满足如下公式；其中，N DMRS表示第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，N表示第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000029
表示第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000030
上述可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销是根据DMRS配置集合内每个DMRS配置下PSCCH DMRS的第一开销确定的，从而允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量，这样可确保在一个传输块的初传和重传的过程中如果信道状态发生变换时，可以通过增加DMRS符号数量，从而提高信道估计准确性，进而确保传输可靠性保证；同时，在信道状态较好的情况下，可以通过减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH的吞吐量。
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：根据该DMRS配置集合内第n个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量和DMRS频域密度，确定第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销。其中，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合，该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。上述可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销是根据DMRS 配置集合内每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量确定的，从而可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量，这样通过设置不同的DMRS符号数量，可以在信道状态较差或SINR降低时增加DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH译码效率，或者在信道状态较好或SINR提升时减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH信道吞吐量。
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH DMRS与侧行控制信道PSCCH在时域上无重叠时，第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销数量满足如下公式：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000031
当该PSSCH DMRS与该PSCCH在时域上有重叠时，第n个DMRS配置下所述第一时频资源中所述PSSCH DMRS的第一开销满足如下公式：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000032
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000033
表示第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000034
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，k n表示第n个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000035
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，P表示DMRS频域密度，P为正整数。
上述可能的实现方式中，均能够在PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH有时域重叠或者无时域重叠时，准确地确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，从而确定传输块的TBS，从而实现同一传输块的多次传输的合并增益；此外，通过区分该PSSCH DMRS与该PSCCH在时域上是否有重叠，可以进一步精确地确定该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，从而实现预设的PSSCH传输码率的目的，降低由于传输码率过低带来的资源浪费或者码率过高带来的传输不可靠性。
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个物理资源块PRB包括的子载波数量，第一时间单元内该PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中相位追踪参考信号PTRS和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的开销，该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。上述可能的实现方式中，通过考虑上述多个不同的参数，可以在确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量时，提高用于传输数据的RE数量的准确性。
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，N RE表示第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000036
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000037
表示第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000038
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000039
在第三方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000040
上述两种可能的实现方式中，通过考虑第一时频资源中不同信息的开销，可以在确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量时，提高用于传输数据的RE数量的准确性。
可选地，在该方法应用于发送端的场景下，该方法还可以包括：根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；发送该传输块。在该方法应用于接收端的场景下，该方法还可以包括：根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；接收该传输块。
第四方面，提供一种传输块尺寸确定装置，该装置可以应用于V2X的发送端，也可以应用于V2X的接收端，该装置包括：处理单元，用于根据第一时频资源对应的解调参考信号DMRS配置集合的DMRS配置数量，以及该DMRS配置集合内每个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的第一开销，确定第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；处理单元，还用于根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量也可以替换为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量或者第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量；其中，该用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销为占用的平均RE数量。其中，第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销可以是指每个DMRS配置下该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量；该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，具体可以是多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS的第一开销的平均值。
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销满足如下公式；其中，N DMRS表示第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，N表示第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000041
表示第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000042
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：根据该DMRS配置集合内第n个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量和DMRS频域密度，确定第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销。其中，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合，该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH DMRS与侧行控制信道PSCCH在时域上无重叠时，第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销数量满足如下公式：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000043
当该PSSCH DMRS与该PSCCH在时域上有重叠时，第n个DMRS配置下所述第一时频资源中所述PSSCH DMRS的第一开销满足如下公式：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000044
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000045
表示第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000046
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，k n表示第n个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000047
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，P表示DMRS频域密度，P为正整数。
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个物理资源块PRB包括的子载波数量，第一时间单元内该PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中相位追踪参考信号PTRS和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的开销，该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，N RE表示第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000048
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000049
表示第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000050
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000051
在第四方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足如下公式；其中，Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000052
可选地，在该装置应用于发送端的场景下，该装置还包括发送单元；处理单元，还用于根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；发送单元，用于发送该传输块。在该装置应用于接收端的场景下，该装置还包括接收单元；处理单元，还用于根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；接收单元，还用于接收该传输块。
第五方面，提供一种传输块尺寸确定方法，该方法可以应用于第一终端设备，第一终端设备可以为V2X的发送端，该方法包括：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子，第二指示信息用于指示侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销，第一指示信息指示的第二控制信息的调整因子可用于确定第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销；第一终端设备根据第二控制信息的调整因子和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定侧行数据信道PSSCH传输块尺寸TBS。
上述技术方案中，当存在不同方式确定的PSSCH DMRS的开销，或者存在多个第二控制信息的调整因子的配置时，支持在PSSCH初传和重传过程中灵活使用各种配置， 同时为用户提供一种选择PSSCH DMRS的开销的自由度，从而用户可以综合考虑PSSCH链路的信道状态、一个资源池上配置的不同DMRS配置和第二控制信息的调整因子，以提高译码的可靠性。同时，该方法可以使得发送端和接收端在确定TBS时，保证确定的第二控制信息的开销，和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销相同，从而可以保证发送端和接收端确定的TBS是一致的，从而可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销可以是指占用的平均RE数量。该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为1比特。上述可能的实现方式可以减小第一指示信息占用的比特数。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二控制信息的调整因子等于第一控制信息中携带的调整因子β，或者第二控制信息的调整因子等于配置的至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000053
上述可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息可以通过隐式指示方式指示不同的第二控制信息的调整因子，从而提高了第二指示信息的指示灵活性和多样性。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为第二控制信息的调整因子β'。可选的，β'为正整数，且β'是配置的第二控制信息对应的调整因子集合中的任意一个、或者β'大于或等于调整因子集合中的最小值且小于或等于调整因子集合中的最大值。上述可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息可以通过显式指示方式指示第二控制信息的调整因子，比如，第二指示信息具体可以为第二控制信息的调整因子的索引值。上述可能的实现方式，提供了一种简单有效的第一指示信息的指示方式。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息为1比特。上述可能的实现方式可以减小第二指示信息占用的比特数。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息用于指示PSSCH DMRS的开销，包括：第二指示信息用于指示根据第一控制信息中携带的DMRS符号数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销；或者，第二指示信息用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销。上述可能的实现方式中，能够实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。另外，本方案在确定TBS时，是根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量，这样可确保在一个传输块的初传和重传的过程中如果信道状态发生变换时，可以通过增加DMRS符号数量，从而提高信道估计准确性，进而确保传输可靠性保证；同时，在信道状态较好的情况下，可以通过减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH的吞吐量。
在第五方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还可以包括：第一终端设备根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；第一终端设备发送该传输块。
第六方面，提供一种传输块尺寸确定方法，该方法可以应用于第二终端设备，第二终端设备可以为V2X的接收端，该方法包括：第二终端设备接收来自第一终端设备 的第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子，第二指示信息用于指示侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销；第二终端设备根据第二控制信息的调整因子和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定侧行数据信道PSSCH传输块尺寸TBS。
上述技术方案中，当存在不同方式确定的PSSCH DMRS的开销，或者存在多个第二控制信息的调整因子的配置时，支持在PSSCH初传和重传过程中灵活使用各种配置，同时为用户提供一种选择PSSCH DMRS的开销的自由度，从而用户可以综合考虑PSSCH链路的信道状态、一个资源池上配置的不同DMRS配置和第二控制信息的调整因子，以提高译码的可靠性。同时，该方法可以使得发送端和接收端在确定TBS时，保证确定的第二控制信息的开销，和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销相同，从而可以保证发送端和接收端确定的TBS是一致的，从而可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
在第六方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销可以是指占用的平均RE数量。该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量。
在第六方便的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为1比特。上述可能的实现方式可以减小第一指示信息占用的比特数。
在第六方便的一种可能的实现方式中，第二控制信息的调整因子等于第一控制信息中携带的调整因子β，或者第二控制信息的调整因子等于配置的至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000054
上述可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息可以通过隐式指示方式指示不同的第二控制信息的调整因子，从而提高了第二指示信息的指示灵活性和多样性。
在第六方便的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为第二控制信息的调整因子β'。可选的，β'为正整数，且β'是配置的第二控制信息对应的调整因子集合中的任意一个、或者β'大于或等于调整因子集合中的最小值且小于或等于调整因子集合中的最大值。上述可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息可以通过显式指示方式指示第二控制信息的调整因子，比如，第二指示信息具体可以为第二控制信息的调整因子的索引值。上述可能的实现方式，提供了一种简单有效的第一指示信息的指示方式。
在第六方便的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息为1比特。上述可能的实现方式可以减小第二指示信息占用的比特数。
在第六方便的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息用于指示PSSCH DMRS的开销，包括：第二指示信息用于指示根据第一控制信息中携带的DMRS符号数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销；或者，第二指示信息用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销。上述可能的实现方式中，能够实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。另外，本方案在确定TBS时，是根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量，这样可确保在一个传输块的初传和重传的过程中如果信道状态发生变换时，可以通过增加DMRS符号数量，从而提高信道估计准确性，进而确保传输可 靠性保证；同时，在信道状态较好的情况下，可以通过减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH的吞吐量。
在第六方便的一种可能的实现方式中，该方法还可以包括：第二终端设备根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；第二终端设备接收该传输块。
第七方面，提供一种传输块尺寸确定装置，该装置可以应用于第一终端设备，第一终端设备可以为V2X的发送端，该装置包括：发送单元，用于向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子，第二指示信息用于指示侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销；处理单元，用于根据第二控制信息的调整因子和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定侧行数据信道PSSCH传输块尺寸TBS。
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销可以是指占用的平均RE数量。该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量。
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为1比特。
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二控制信息的调整因子等于第一控制信息中携带的调整因子β，或者第二控制信息的调整因子等于配置的至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000055
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为第二控制信息的调整因子β'。可选的，β'为正整数，且β'是配置的第二控制信息对应的调整因子集合中的任意一个、或者β'大于或等于调整因子集合中的最小值且小于或等于调整因子集合中的最大值。
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息为1比特。
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息用于指示PSSCH DMRS的开销，包括：第二指示信息用于指示根据第一控制信息中携带的DMRS符号数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销；或者，第二指示信息用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销。
在第七方面的一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元，还用于根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；发送单元，还用于发送该传输块。
第八方面，提供一种传输块尺寸确定装置，该装置可以应用于第二终端设备，第二终端设备可以为V2X的接收端，该装置包括：接收单元，用于接收来自第一终端设备的第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子，第二指示信息用于指示侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的开销；处理单元，用于根据第二控制信息的调整因子和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定侧行数据信道PSSCH传输块尺寸TBS。
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该开销可以是指占用的平均RE数量。该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元；第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量。
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为1比特。
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二控制信息的调整因子等于第一控制信息中携带的调整因子β，或者第二控制信息的调整因子等于配置的至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000056
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第一指示信息为第二控制信息的调整因子β'。可选的，β'为正整数，且β'是配置的第二控制信息对应的调整因子集合中的任意一个、或者β'大于或等于调整因子集合中的最小值且小于或等于调整因子集合中的最大值。
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息为1比特。
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，第二指示信息用于指示PSSCH DMRS的开销，包括：第二指示信息用于指示根据第一控制信息中携带的DMRS符号数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销；或者，第二指示信息用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销。
在第八方面的一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元，还用于根据所确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，确定传输块大小；接收单元，还用于接收该传输块。
第九方面，提供一种侧行数据信道解调参考信号的符号确定方法，该方法可以应用于V2X的发送端，也可以应用于V2X的接收端，该方法包括：根据第一时频资源中的侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的DMRS符号数量、以及侧行数据信道PSSCH的参考符号数量，确定该PSSCH DMRS在所述第一时频资源中的符号映射位置；其中，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元，在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。
上述技术方案中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以根据第一时频资源中的PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号数量、以及PSSCH的参考符号数量，确定该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中的符号映射位置，从而使得发送端和接收端可以快速、高效地确定该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置。另外，由于PSFCH符号数量和PSCCH符号数量在一个资源池中是固定配置的，对发送端和接收端用户都是已知信息，该方案定义的PSSCH参考符号数量就是第一时间单元包含符号数量排除PSFCH占用的符号数量的影响、排除第一时间单元内AGC符号和最后一个GAP符号的影响，同时根据PSSCH和PSCCH包含的PRB数量的关系，排除PSCCH的影响，确定的参数。这样一方面可以保证现有的PSSCH DMRS配置在PSSCH和PSCCH带宽相同时可以工作，另外一方面保证了PSSCH DMRS配置包含的符号数量的使用场景不受PSFCH存在的影响。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该参考符号数量为根据以下至少一种确定的符号数量：第一时间单元内排除的侧行控制信道的符号开销；第一时间单元内排除的侧行反馈信道的符号开销；第一时间单元内排除的自动增益控制AGC符号；第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔GAP符号。上述可能的实现方式，通过考虑不同的符号开销，来确定该参考符号数量，可以提高确定的该参考符号数量的准确性。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该参考符号数量由第一配置信息确定，第一配置信息包括以下至少一项：第一时间单元包含的符号数量，侧行反馈信道的反馈配置周期信息，该侧行反馈信道和该侧行反馈信道的保护间隔包含的符号数量，该PSSCH包括的物理资源块PRB数量与侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量的关系。上述可能的实现方式，提供了一种简单、有效地确定该参考符号数量的方式。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量不相等时，该参考符号数量满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000057
表示该参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000058
表示第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔GAP符号和/或自动增益控制AGC符号的符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000059
表示侧行反馈信道的符号开销；其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000060
上述可能的实现方式中，能够在该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量不相等时，准确地确定出该参考符号数量。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000061
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000062
表示第一时间单元的起始符号位置，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000063
表示该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置。上述可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置可以是由第一时间单元的起始符号位置、该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置，这样可以使得该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置从首个符号位置开始，从而大大提高了译码效率。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与该侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量相等时，该参考符号数量满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000064
表示该参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000065
表示第一时间单元内排除最后一个间隔GAP符号和/或自动增益控制AGC符号的符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000066
表示该侧行反馈信道的符号开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000067
表示侧行控制信道的符号开销；其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000068
上述可能的实现方式中，能够在该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量相等时，准确地确定出该参考符号数量。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000069
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000070
表示第一时间单元的起始符号位置，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000071
表示该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000072
表示该侧行控制信道的符号开销。上述可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置可以是由第一时间单元的起始符号位置、该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置，这样可以使得该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置从首个符号位置开始，从而大大提高了译码效率。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该侧行反馈信道的符号开销与所述侧行反馈信道的反馈配置周期信息有关。可选的，对于PSFCH的符号开销，若PSFCH的反馈配置周期表示为W，PSFCH和PSFCH的保护间隔包含的符号数量表示为Z，则PSFCH的符号开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000073
满足：当W不为0时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000074
且Z＝3，或者
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000075
表示向上取整；当W为0时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000076
上述可能的实现方式中，提供了一种简单、有效的确定SFCH的符号开销的方式。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置超出该PSSCH的包含符号时，超出的所述符号映射位置不映射该PSSCH DMRS。示例性的，若该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置分别为sym1、sym4、sym7和sym10，该PSSCH的包含符号为sym1至sym9时，则sym10超出该PSSCH的包含符号，从而sym10上不映射该PSSCH DMRS。
在第九方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中的符号映射位置还与侧行控制信道的符号开销有关。可选的，该PSCCH的符号开销为2，即该PSCCH占用第一时间单元中的2个符号；或者，该PSCCH的符号开销为3，即该PSCCH占用第一时间单元中的3个符号。
第十方面，提供一种侧行数据信道解调参考信号的符号确定装置，该装置可以应用于V2X的发送端，也可以应用于V2X的接收端，该装置包括：处理单元，用于根据第一时频资源中的侧行数据信道PSSCH解调参考信号DMRS的DMRS符号数量、以及侧行数据信道PSSCH的参考符号数量，确定该PSSCH DMRS在所述第一时频资源中的符号映射位置；其中，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元，在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该参考符号数量为根据以下至少一种确定的符号数量：第一时间单元内排除的侧行控制信道的符号开销；第一时间单元内排除的侧行反馈信道的符号开销；第一时间单元内排除的自动增益控制AGC符号；第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔GAP符号。
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该参考符号数量由第一配置信息确定，第一配置信息包括以下至少一项：第一时间单元包含的符号数量，侧行反馈信道的反馈配置周期信息，该侧行反馈信道和该侧行反馈信道的保护间隔包含的符号数量，该PSSCH包括的物理资源块PRB数量与侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量的关系。
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量不相等时，该参考符号数量满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000077
表示该参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000078
表示第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔GAP符号和/或自动增益控制AGC符号的符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000079
表示侧行反馈信道的符号开销；其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000080
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000081
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000082
表示第一时间单元的起始符号位置，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000083
表示该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置。
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与该侧行控制信道包括的PRB数量相等时，该参考符号数量满足如下公式；其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000084
表示该参考符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000085
表示第一时间单元内排除最后一个间隔GAP符号和/或自动增益控 制AGC符号的符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000086
表示该侧行反馈信道的符号开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000087
表示侧行控制信道的符号开销；其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3；
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000088
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000089
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000090
表示第一时间单元的起始符号位置，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000091
表示该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000092
表示该侧行控制信道的符号开销。
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该侧行反馈信道的符号开销与所述侧行反馈信道的反馈配置周期信息有关。可选的，对于PSFCH的符号开销，若PSFCH的反馈配置周期表示为W，PSFCH和PSFCH的保护间隔包含的符号数量表示为Z，则PSFCH的符号开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000093
满足：当W不为0时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000094
且Z＝3，或者
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000095
表示向上取整；当W为0时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000096
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，当该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置超出该PSSCH的包含符号时，超出的所述符号映射位置不映射该PSSCH DMRS。示例性的，若该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置分别为sym1、sym4、sym7和sym10，该PSSCH的包含符号为sym1至sym9时，则sym10超出该PSSCH的包含符号，从而sym10上不映射该PSSCH DMRS。
在第十方面的一种可能的实现方式中，该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中的符号映射位置还与侧行控制信道的符号开销有关。可选的，该PSCCH的符号开销为2，即该PSCCH占用第一时间单元中的2个符号；或者，该PSCCH的符号开销为3，即该PSCCH占用第一时间单元中的3个符号。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器，以及与该处理器耦合的存储器，该处理器可用于执行该存储器中的指令，以使得该装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口和总线，处理器、存储器和通信接口通过该总线耦合。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器，以及与该处理器耦合的存储器，该处理器可用于执行该存储器中的指令，以使得该装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口和总线，处理器、存储器和通信接口通过该总线耦合。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器，以及与该处理器耦合的存储器，该处理器可用于执行该存储器中的指令，以使得该装置执行上述第五方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口和总线，处理器、存储器和通信接口通过该总线耦合。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器，以及与该处理器耦合的存储器，该处理器可用于执行该存储器中的指令，以使得该装置执行上述第六方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口和总线，处理器、存储器和通信接口通过该总线耦合。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器，以及与该处理 器耦合的存储器，该处理器可用于执行该存储器中的指令，以使得该装置执行上述第九方面或第九方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。可选地，该装置还包括通信接口和总线，处理器、存储器和通信接口通过该总线耦合。
在本申请的另一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器，该处理器用于运行所述代码指令，以使该装置执行第一方面或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器，该处理器用于运行所述代码指令，以使该装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器，该处理器用于运行所述代码指令，以使该装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器，该处理器用于运行所述代码指令，以使该装置执行上述第五方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器，该处理器用于运行所述代码指令，以使该装置执行上述第六方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信装置，该装置包括处理器和接口电路，该接口电路用于接收代码指令并传输至该处理器，该处理器用于运行所述代码指令，以使该装置执行上述第九方面或第九方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括网络设备、第一终端设备和第二终端设备；其中，第一终端设备用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法，或执行上述第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法，或执行上述第五方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法，或执行上述第九方面或第九方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法；第二终端设备用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法，或执行上述第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法，或执行上述第六方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法，或执行上述第九方面或第九方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当该计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当该计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行 上述第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当该计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第五方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当该计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第六方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当该计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第九方面或第九方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第五方面或第五方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第六方面或第六方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
在本申请的另一方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第九方面或第九方面中任一种可能实现方式所提供的方法。
可以理解地，上述提供的任一种传输块尺寸确定方法及侧行数据信道解调参考信号的符号确定的装置、计算机存储介质或者计算机程序产品均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种第一时频资源的示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的另一种第一时频资源的示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的另一种第一时频资源的示意图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种传输块尺寸确定装置的结构示意图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
本申请中，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b，或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c，a-b，a-c，b-c，或a-b-c，其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。另外，本申请实施例采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。例如，第一阈值和第二阈值仅仅是为了区分不同的阈值，并不对其先后顺序进行限定。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定。本申请实施例中涉及到公式中的“*”表示乘号。
需要说明的是，本申请中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于设备到设备(device to device，D2D)场景中，可选地，可以应用于车联网(vehicle to everything，V2X)场景中。示例性的，V2X场景可具体为以下系统中的任一种：车车通信(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)、车人通信(vehicle to pedestrian，V2P)、车-网络(vehicle to network，V2N)业务和车与基础设施通信(vehicle to infrastructure，V2I)等。
示例性的，D2D可以是长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)D2D，新无线(new radio，NR)D2D，还可以是随着技术的发展可能出现的其他通信系统中的D2D。类似地，V2X可以是LTE V2X、NR V2X，还可以是随着技术的发展可能出现的其他通信系统中的V2X。
本申请实施例描述的业务场景以及通信系统是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定，本领域普通技术人员可知，随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现，本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题，同样适用。本申请实施例中以提供的方法应用于新无线(New Radio，NR)系统或5G网络中为例进行说明。
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的结构示意图。参见图1，该通信系统包括：接入网设备10、以及至少两个终端设备20，接入网设备10可以与至少两个终端设备20进行通信，至少两个终端设备20之间也可以进行通信。图1中以至少两个终端设备20包括终端设备21和终端设备22为例进行说明，终端设备21和终端设备22可以是同一公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)中的两个终端设备，也可以是不同PLMN中的两个终端设备。比如，在图1中的(a)中，终端设备21和终端设备22同为PLMN1中的两个终端设备；在图1中的(b)中，终端设备 21是PLMN1中的终端设备，终端设备22不是PLMN1中的终端设备。
可选的，图1所示的通信系统还可以包括：核心网。接入网设备10可以与核心网连接。核心网可以是4G核心网(例如，核心分组网演进(evolved packet core，EPC))或者5G核心网(5G Core，5GC)、或未来的各种通信系统中的核心网。
以核心网可以是4G核心网为例，接入网设备10可以为4G系统中的演进型基站(evolved Node B，eNB或eNodeB)。终端设备21可以为与eNB进行信息传输的终端设备。eNB通过S1接口接入EPC网。
以核心网可以5G核心网为例，接入网设备10可以为NR系统中的下一代节点B(The Next Generation Node B，gNB)，终端设备21可以为与gNB进行信息传输的终端设备。gNB通过NG接口接入5G核心网。
当然，接入网设备10还可以为第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)协议基站，或者可以为非3GPP协议基站。
其中，接入网设备10与终端设备21或终端设备22之间具有第一传输链路，例如，第一传输链路可以为Uu链路，可以用于传输Uu业务。终端设备21与终端设备22之间具有第二传输链路，例如，第二传输链路可以为侧行链路(sidelink，SL)，可以用于传输V2X业务。
终端设备21与终端设备22可以在侧行链路上彼此传输V2X业务，也可以称为侧行链路信息。终端设备21或终端设备22可以在Uu链路上向接入网设备10传输上行(uplink，UL)Uu业务，也可以在Uu链路上接收接入网设备10发送的下行(downlink，DL)Uu业务。
其中，终端设备21与终端设备22之间的直连通信接口可以为接口1。例如接口1可以称为PC5接口，采用车联网专用频段(如5.9GHz)。终端设备21与接入网设备10之间的接口可以称为接口2(例如，Uu接口)，采用蜂窝网频段(如1.8GHz)。上述接口1、接口2的名称仅是个示例，本申请实施例对接口1、接口2的名称不作限定。
终端设备21或者终端设备22可以是一种具有无线通信功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载。也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等)。还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备又称之为用户设备(user equipment，UE)，移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)以及终端设备等，是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。例如，终端设备包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前，终端设备可以是：手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、可穿戴设备(例如智能手表、智能手环、计步器等)，车载设备(例如，汽车、自行车、电动车、飞机、船舶、火车、高铁等)、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、智能家居设备(例如，冰箱、电视、空调、电表等)、智能机器人、车间设备、无人驾驶(self-driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备，或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备、飞行设备(例如，智能机器人、热气球、无人机、飞机)等。本申请 一种可能的应用的场景中终端设备为经常工作在地面的终端设备，例如车载设备。在本申请中，为了便于叙述，部署在上述设备中的芯片，例如片上系统(system-on-a-chip，SOC)、基带芯片等，或者其他具备通信功能的芯片也可以称为终端设备。
终端设备21或者终端设备22可以是具有相应通信功能的车辆，或者车载通信装置，或者其它嵌入式通信装置，也可以是用户手持通信设备，包括手机，平板电脑等。
作为示例，在本申请实施例中，终端设备21或者终端设备22还可以包括可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。
接入网设备10为与终端设备21或者终端设备22配合使用的一种可以用于发射或接收信号的实体。例如，可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point，AP)，还可以是LTE中的演进型基站(evolved Node B，eNB或eNodeB)，或者中继站或接入点，或者车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的接入网设备等。
另外，在本申请实施例中，接入网设备为小区提供服务，终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如，时域资源，或者，频域资源，或者，时频资源)与接入网设备进行通信。该小区可以是接入网设备(例如基站)对应的小区，小区可以属于宏基站，也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站，这里的小小区可以包括：城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(Pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等，这些小小区具有覆盖范围小和发射功率低的特点，适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。
下面对本申请实施例中所涉及到的名词进行介绍说明：
侧行链路(sidelink，SL)：是针对终端设备和终端设备之间直接通信定义的，即终端设备和终端设备之间不通过网络设备转发而直接通信的链路。
侧行链路的物理层主要包括四种信道类型，即侧行链路物理层控制信道(physical sidelink control channel，PSCCH)、侧行链路物理层共享信道(physical sidelink share channel，PSSCH)、侧行链路物理层广播信道和侧行链路物理层反馈信道(physical sidelink feedback channel，PSFCH)。在本申请实施例中，将侧行链路物理层控制信道可以称为PSCCH或者侧行控制信道，将侧行链路物理层共享信道可以称为PSSCH或者侧行数据信道，将侧行链路物理层反馈信道可以称为PSFCH或者侧行反馈信道。
侧行链路通信的时频资源是基于侧行链路通信的资源池来配置的，该资源池可以是指用于侧行链路通信的时间资源和频率资源的集合，时间资源也可以称为时域资源，频率资源也可以称为时域资源。
其中，时域资源可以通过帧(frame)、子帧(sub-frame)、时隙(slot)或符号(symbol)等表示；其中，一个帧中可以包括多个子帧，一个子帧中可以包括多个时隙，一个时隙中可以包括多个符号，比如一个时隙可以包括14个符号。频域资源可以通过子信道 (sub-channel)、物理资源块(physical resource block，PRB)或者子载波(sub-carrier，SC)等表示；其中，一个子信道可以包括频域上连续的多个PRB，一个PRB中可以包括多个子载波，PRB也可以称为资源块(resource block，RB)。
另外，PSCCH在频域上可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB，PSSCH在频域上可以占用一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH和PSSCH在时域可以占用一个或者多个SL的时间单元，每个时间单元可以包括连续的多个符号，这多个连续的符号可以通过无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)信令来配置，具体可以通过配置起始符号位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000097
和符号数量来确定。比如，若RRC信令配置的SL的时间单元的起始符号位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000098
为0、符号数量为14，则该时间单元可以为一个时隙。
侧行数据信道解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)是指用于解调PSSCH的参考信号，也可以称为用于解调PSSCH的导频信号。本文中可以将侧行数据信道解调参考信号的缩写表示为PSSCH DMRS。
在本申请实施例中，下文中涉及的DMRS配置可以是指DMRS时域图样的配置，也即是DMRS配置与DMRS时域图样的配置可以相互替换。下文中涉及的第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量可以是指第一时频资源中承载的数据占用的RE数量，也可以称为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量，也可以是指第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量(the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH)，上述这几种描述可以相互替换。下文中涉及的一个PRB在第一时间单元内用于传输数据的RE数量也可以替换为一个PRB中分配给PSSCH的RE数量(the number of REs allocated for PSSCH within a PRB)。本文中的符号可以为正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号，即本文中的符号可以替换为OFDM符号。
图2是本申请提供的一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图，该方法可应用于发送端，也可应用于接收端。发送端和接收端可以为通过D2D方式通信的两个终端设备，例如发送端可以称为第一终端设备，接收端可以称为第二终端设备。下面对该方法中的各步骤进行详细说明。
S201：确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元。
其中，第一时频资源是用于侧行链路通信的时频资源，该时频资源可以包括时域资源和频域资源。第一时频资源在时域上可以包括第一时间单元，第一时间单元可以包括多个符号，第一时间单元可以由网络侧设备配置，该网络侧设备可以为接入网设备或者核心网设备，比如，网络侧设备可以通过配置这多个符号中的第一个起始符号和这多个符号的数量来配置第一时间单元。第一时频资源在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，每个子信道可以包括频域上连续的多个PRB，这一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，对于任意一个子信道，网络侧设备可以配置该子信道包括的多个PRB中的第一个PRB的序号和该子信道包括的PRB的数量来配置该子信道。其中，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。
比如，如图3所示，第一时频资源在时域上的第一时间单元可以包括14个符号且依次表示为sym0至sym13，在频域上占用的子信道可以共包括7个PRB。其中，在 第一时频资源中，该PSSCH DMRS和该PSCCH在时域上可以有两种情况，且分别为该PSSCH DMRS和该PSCCH在时域上重叠(如图3中的(a)所示)，以及该PSSCH DMRS和PSCCH在时域上不重叠(如图3中的(b)所示)。图3中的AGC表示用于自动增益控制(automatic gain control，AGC)符号，其长度可以是1个符号(如图3所示)或者第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。GAP表示最后一个间隔(gap)符号。
另外，该PSSCH DMRS的开销(overhead)可以是指该PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量，从而第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在时域上为第一时间单元、频域上为一个PRB的物理资源中占用的平均RE数量。
可选的，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销可以包括：根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销。
其中，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合。该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。
比如，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合为{2,3,4}，则该DMRS配置集合包括3个DMRS配置。其中，DMRS配置{2}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为2；DMRS配置{3}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为3；DMRS配置{4}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为4。
具体的，对于第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，具体可以根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量、每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量、一个PRB中包括的子载波数量和频域密度确定。
示例性的，若N表示第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，k n表示每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000099
表示一个PRB中包括的子载波数量，P表示DMRS频域密度(即每P个RE中有一个RE映射DMRS)，P为正整数。该PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000100
满足如下公式(1-1)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000101
其中，P可以为常数，比如，P可以等于2、3、4等，P的具体数值可以事先设置。当P＝2时，该PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000102
满足如下公式(1-2)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000103
示例性的，假设第一时间单元包括14个符号，一个PRB包括12个子载波，则当P＝2时，下面7种DMRS配置集合与一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000104
的关系具体如下表1所示。
表1
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000105
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000106
S202：根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定PSSCH的TBS。
其中，用于传输数据的RE中的数据是指传输块TB的数据，该数据不包括控制信息、DMRS和其他参考信号(reference signal，RS)等。第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量可以是指第一时频资源中承载的数据占用的RE数量，也可以称为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量，也可以是指第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量。当确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销时，可以根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。
可选的，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个PRB包括的子载波数量，一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中相位追踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal，PTRS)和/或信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)的开销，第一时频资源中该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。
其中，该PSCCH用于承载第一控制信息，具体可以包括侧行数据信道的物理层资源信息、DMRS配置信息、DMRS端口数、编码调制信号(modulation and code signal，MCS)和第二控制信息的格式等解调信息。该PSSCH用于承载数据信息和第二控制信息，第二控制信息主要用于承载除PSSCH DMRS以外的其他控制信息，具体可以包括信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)上报触发信息，PSSCH的目的用户的IP，PSSCH HARQ进程号，新传数据指示(new data indicator)，HARQ传输版本号等信息。
另外，PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销可以是指PTRS和/或CSI-RS占用的平均RE数量。第一控制信息的开销可以是指第一控制信息占用的平均RE数量，或者第一控制信息占用的RE数量。第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息占用的平均RE数量。PTRS和/或CSI-RS、第一控制信息和第二控制信息分别占用的平均RE数量也可以称为占用的RE数量。
再者，一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量可以是预配置的，或者是由网络侧设备配置的。其中，第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量可以是指第一时间单元内的排除以下符号开销的符号数量：PSCCH的符号开销，PSFCH的符号开销，自动增益控制(AGC)符号，最后一个间隔(GAP)符号。其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。
具体的，若
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000107
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000108
表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内该PSSCH的参考符号数量，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000109
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(1-3)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000110
或者，若一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量存在上限，且Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(1-4)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000111
公式(1-4)中，N' RE满足
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000112
N' RE表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内用于传输数据的RE数量；其中，一个PRB在第一时间单元内用于传输数据的RE数量也可以替换为一个PRB中分配给PSSCH的RE数量(the number of REs allocated for PSSCH within a PRB)。因此，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(1-5)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000113
其中，Q为正整数，比如，Q可以等于132、144或者156；或者，Q＝12*(N sym-a)，a的取值范围为1、2、3等整数，N sym表示第一时间单元包含的符号数量(也可以称为第一时间单元包含的符号长度)，a表示第一时间单元内的符号开销，可以包含AGC符号、最后一个GAP符号等至少一个。
S203：根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，确定PSSCH的TBS。
具体的，当确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量时，可以根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量、以及MCS和目标码率(target code rate)的对照表确定PSSCH的TBS。
MCS和目标码率的对照表可以如下表2所示，包括不同MCS索引对应的调制阶数(modulation order)、目标码率和频谱效率。表2中，I MCS表示MCS索引，Q m表示调制阶数，R表示目标码率。
表2
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000114
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000115
需要说明的是，步骤S203中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法与现有NR系统中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法一致，具体可以参见相关技术中的描述，本申请实施例在此不再赘述。
可选地，该方法还可以包括：发送端根据该TBS，发送传输块。相应地，接收端根据该TBS，接收该传输块，即接收端对该传输块进行信道译码。
在本申请实施例中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以先确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，并根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。由于该PSSCH DMRS的开销为多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量，而不是单次传输时PSSCH DMRS占用的实际RE数量，所以针对于初传和重传，根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量是不变的，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定的TBS是相同的。因此，本申请实施例提供的方法可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
此外，本申请在确定TBS时，是根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以本申请实施例可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中 携带不同的DMRS符号数量。另外，通过设置不同的DMRS符号数量，可以在信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)降低时增加DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH译码效率，或者在SINR提升时减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH信道吞吐量。
图4为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图，该方法可应用于发送端，也可应用于接收端。发送端和接收端可以为通过D2D方式通信的两个终端设备，例如发送端可以称为第一终端设备，接收端可以称为第二终端设备。下面对该方法中的各步骤进行详细说明。
S301：确定第一时频资源的每个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，第一时频资源在时域上包括第一时间单元。
其中，第一时频资源是用于侧行链路通信的时频资源，该时频资源可以包括时域资源和频域资源。第一时频资源在时域上可以包括第一时间单元，第一时间单元可以包括多个符号，第一时间单元可以由网络侧设备配置，该网络侧设备可以为接入网设备或者核心网设备，比如，网络侧设备可以通过配置这多个符号中的第一个起始符号和这多个符号的数量来配置第一时间单元。第一时频资源在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，每个子信道可以包括频域上连续的多个PRB，这一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，对于任意一个子信道，网络侧设备可以配置该子信道包括的多个PRB中的第一个PRB的序号和该子信道包括的PRB的数量来配置该子信道。其中，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。
比如，如图3所示，第一时频资源在时域上的第一时间单元可以包括14个符号且依次表示为sym0至sym13，在频域上占用的子信道可以共包括7个PRB。其中，在第一时频资源中，该PSSCH DMRS和该PSCCH在时域上可以有两种情况，且分别为该PSSCH DMRS和该PSCCH在时域上重叠(如图3中的(a)所示)，以及该PSSCH DMRS和PSCCH在时域上不重叠(如图3中的(b)所示)。图3中的AGC表示用于自动增益控制(automatic gain control，AGC)符号，其长度可以是1个符号(如3图所示)或者为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。GAP表示最后一个间隔(gap)符号。
另外，该PSSCH DMRS的开销(overhead)可以是指该PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量。该PSSCH DMRS的开销需要考虑第一时频资源对应的PSSCH DRMS配置集合内的每一个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，同时考虑PSCCH对PSSCH DMRS映射的影响。第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在时域上为第一时间单元、频域上为该PRB的物理资源中占用的平均RE数量。考虑PSCCH对PSSCH DMRS映射的影响在每个PRB上不同，每个PRB上该PSSCH DMRS的开销也可以不同。
可选的，确定第一时频资源的每个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销可以包括：根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量、每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSSCH符号(即PSSCH占用的符号)是否有时域重叠，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销。
其中，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合。该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。
比如，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合为{2,3,4}，则该DMRS配置集合包括3个DMRS配置。其中，DMRS配置{2}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为2；DMRS配置{3}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为3；DMRS配置{4}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为4。
具体的，对于第一时频资源的一个PRB，若不考虑该PRB在每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSSCH符号是否有时域重叠，则该PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，具体可以根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量、每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量、一个PRB中包括的子载波数量和频域密度确定。
示例性的，若N表示第一时频资源对应的PSSCH DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，k n表示每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000116
表示一个PRB中包括的子载波数量，P表示DMRS频域密度(即每P个RE中有一个RE映射DMRS)，P为正整数。该PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000117
满足如下公式(2-1)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000118
其中，P可以为常数，比如，P可以等于2、3、4等，P的具体数值可以事先设置。当P＝2时，该PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000119
满足如下公式(2-2)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000120
示例性的，假设第一时间单元包括14个符号，一个PRB包括12个子载波，则当P＝2时，上述表1中的7种DMRS配置集合与该PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000121
的关系具体可以如上述表1所示。
进一步的，考虑所述DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSCCH符号是否有时域重叠，确定第一时频资源的一个PRB中该PSSCH DMRS的开销具体可以如下文所述。
比如，如图3中的(a)和(b)所示，第一时频资源中配置了两个PSSCH DMRS配置，分别是2个符号的DMRS配置和3个符号的DMRS配置。其中，三个符号的DMRS配置中的第一个DMRS符号与PSCCH有时域重叠，则需要在PSCCH所在的PRB上考虑PSCCH带来的影响。
具体的，一个PRB上PSSCH DMRS的开销可以根据第一时频资源对应的PSSCH DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量、每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量、每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSSCH符号是否有时域重叠、一个PRB中包括的子载波数量和频域密度确定。
示例性的，对于第一时频资源中的第i个PRB，若PSCCH和该PSSCH DMRS配置集合内的至少一个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号有时域重叠，该PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销满足如下公式(2-3-1)和(2-3-2)：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000122
i的取值范围为0至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000123
      (2-3-1)
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000124
i的取值范围为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000125
至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000126
      (2-3-2)
对于第一时频资源中的第i个PRB，若PSCCH和该PSSCH DMRS配置集合内的至少一个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号无时域重叠，该PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000127
满足如下公式(2-4)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000128
i的取值范围为0至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000129
      (2-4)
其中，i表示第一时频资源中PRB的索引，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000130
表示第一时频资源中PSCCH包括的PRB数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000131
表示第一时频资源中PSSCH包括的PRB数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000132
表示第一时频资源中第i个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000133
满足上述公式(2-1)，当P＝2时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000134
也可以由表1得到。
在另外一种实施例中，第一时频资源的每个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销可以根据第一时频资源对应的PSSCH DMRS配置集合在每个PRB上实际映射的符号数量确定。
比如，如图3中的(a)和(b)所示，第一时频资源中配置了两个DMRS配置，分别是2个DMRS符号的DMRS配置和3个DMRS符号的DMRS配置。其中3个DMRS符号的DMRS配置中的第一个DMRS符号与PSCCH有时域重叠，那么与PSCCH在频域上有重叠的4个PRB上，在两个DMRS配置下映射的DMRS符号数量都是2，则这4个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销可以基于2个DMRS符号确定；与PSCCH在频域上无重叠的剩下3个PRB上，在两个PSSCH DMRS配置下映射的DMRS符号数量分别是2和3，则这3个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销可以基于2和3的平均值确定开销。
示例性的，若N表示第一时频资源对应的PSSCH DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，k n表示每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000135
表示一个PRB中包括的子载波数量，P表示DMRS频域密度(即每P个RE中有一个RE映射DMRS)，P为正整数。若PSSCH DMRS配置集合内每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSCCH无时域重叠，则第一时频资源中第i个PRB上PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000136
满足如下公式(2-5)：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000137
i的取值范围为0至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000138
      (2-5)
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000139
对于第一时频资源中的第i个PRB，若PSCCH和该DMRS配置集合内的至少一个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号有时域重叠，则该PRB上PSSCH DMRS的开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000140
满足如下公式(2-6)：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000141
i的取值范围为0至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000142
      (2-6)
其中，若第n个PSSCH DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSCCH有时域重叠，k' n,i满足如下公式(2-7-1)和(2-7-2)：
k' n,i＝k n-1，i的取值范围为0至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000143
      (2-7-1)
k' n,i＝k n，i的取值范围为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000144
至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000145
      (2-7-2)
若第n个PSSCH DMRS配置下的DMRS符号与PSCCH无时域重叠，所述k' n,i满足如下公式(2-8)：
k' n,i＝k n，i的取值范围为0至
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000146
      (2-8)
S302：根据每个PRB的PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，用于传输数据的RE数量用于确定PSSCH的TBS。
其中，用于传输数据的RE中的数据是指传输块TB的数据，该数据不包括控制信息、DMRS和其他参考信号(reference signal，RS)等。第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量可以是指第一时频资源中承载的数据占用的RE数量，也可以称为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量，也可以是指第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH信道的RE数量，也可以是指第一时频资源中分配给PSSCH的RE数量(the total number of REs allocated for PSSCH)，上述这几种描述是等价的且可以相互替换。当确定第一时频资源的每个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销时，可以根据每个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。
可选的，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个PRB包括的子载波数量，一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，第一时频资源中该PSSCH包括的PRB数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。
其中，该PSCCH用于承载第一控制信息，具体可以包括侧行数据信道的物理层资源信息、DMRS配置信息、DMRS端口数、编码调制信号(MCS)和第二控制信息的格式等解调信息。该PSSCH用于承载数据信息和第二控制信息，第二控制信息主要用于承载除PSSCH DMRS以外的其他控制信息，具体可以包括CSI上报触发信息，PSSCH的目的用户的IP，PSSCH HARQ进程号，新传数据指示(new data indicator)，HARQ传输版本号等信息。
另外，PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销可以是指PTRS和/或CSI-RS占用的平均RE数量，第一控制信息的开销可以是指第一控制信息占用的平均RE数量，或者第一控制信息占用的RE数量，第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息占用的平均RE数量。PTRS和/或CSI-RS、第一控制信息和第二控制信息分别占用的平均RE数量也可以称为占用的RE数量。
再者，一个PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量可以是预配置的，或者是由网络侧设备配置的。其中，第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量可以是指第一时间单元内的排除以下符号开销的符号数量：PSCCH的符号开销，PSFCH的符号开销，自动增益控制(AGC)符号，最后一个间隔(GAP)符号。其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。
具体的，若
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000147
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000148
表示一个PRB在第一时间单元内该PSSCH的参考符号数量，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000149
表示该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(2-9)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000150
或者，若一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量存在上限，且Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(2-10)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000151
公式(2-10)中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000152
N' RE,i表示第i个PRB在第一时间单元内用于传输数据的RE数量。或者，排除第一控制信息和第二控制信息后，考虑一个PRB中平均用于确定TBS的RE数量存在上限Q，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(2-11)：
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000153
其中，Q为正整数，比如，Q可以等于132、144或者156；或者，Q＝12*(N sym-a)，a的取值范围为1、2、3等整数，N sym表示第一时间单元包含的符号数量(也可以称为第一时间单元包含的符号长度)，a表示第一时间单元内的符号开销，可以包含的AGC符号、最后一个GAP符号等至少一个。
S303：根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，确定PSSCH的TBS。
具体的，当确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量时，可以根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量、以及编码调制信号(MCS)和目标码率的对照表确定PSSCH的TBS。其中，MCS和目标码率的对照表可以如上述表1所示，包括不同MCS索引对应的调制阶数、目标码率和频谱效率。
需要说明的是，步骤S303中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法与现有NR系统中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法一致，具体可以参见相关技术中的描述，本申请实施例在此不再赘述。
可选地，该方法还可以包括：发送端根据该TBS，发送传输块。相应地，接收端根据该TBS，接收该传输块，即接收端对该传输块进行信道译码。
在本申请实施例中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以先确定第一时频资源中的一个PRB中PSSCH DMRS的开销，并根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。由于该PSSCH DMRS的开销为多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量，而不是单次传输时PSSCH DMRS占用的实际RE数量，所以针对于初传和重传，根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量是不变的，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定的TBS是相同的。因此，本申请实施例提供的方法可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
此外，本申请在确定TBS时，是根据第一时频资源中多个DMRS配置下该PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以本申请实施例可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量。另外，通过设置不同的DMRS符号数量，可以在信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus  noise ratio，SINR)降低时增加DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH译码效率，或者在SINR提升时减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH信道吞吐量。
图5为本申请实施例提供的另一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图，该方法可应用于发送端，也可应用于接收端。发送端和接收端可以为通过D2D方式通信的两个终端设备，例如发送端可以称为第一终端设备，接收端可以称为第二终端设备。下面对该方法中的各步骤进行详细说明。
S401：根据第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合的DMRS配置数量，以及该DMRS配置集合内每个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，确定第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第二开销。
其中，第一时频资源是用于侧行链路通信的时频资源，该时频资源可以包括时域资源和频域资源。第一时频资源在时域上可以包括第一时间单元，第一时间单元可以包括多个符号，第一时间单元可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，网络侧设备可以通过配置这多个符号中的第一个起始符号和这多个符号的数量来配置第一时间单元。第一时频资源在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，每个子信道可以包括频域上连续的多个PRB，这一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，对于任意一个子信道，网络侧设备可以配置该子信道包括的多个PRB中的第一个PRB的序号和该子信道包括的PRB的数量来配置该子信道。其中，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。在第一时频资源中，该PSSCH DMRS和该PSCCH在时域上可以重叠，也可以不重叠。
另外，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合可以是指网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源所在的资源池的DMRS配置集合。该DMRS配置集合中可以包括多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。比如，第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合为{2,3,4}，则该DMRS配置集合包括3个DMRS配置；其中，DMRS配置为{2}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为2；DMRS配置{3}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为3；DMRS配置{4}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为4。
再者，该PSSCH DMRS的开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量。第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销可以是指每个DMRS配置下该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量。该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量，具体可以是多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS的第一开销的平均值。
可选的，若N表示第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000154
表示第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，则第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第二开销N DMRS满足如下公式(3-1)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000155
进一步的，如图5所示，该方法还可以包括S400：确定该DMRS配置集合内的第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销。
其中，第n个DMRS配置下第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第一开销与以下至少一项有关：该DMRS配置集合内的DMRS配置数量，第n个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，一个PRB中包括的子载波的数量，该PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，DMRS频域密度。
示例性的，若
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000156
表示第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000157
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，k n表示第n个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000158
表示PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，P表示DMRS频域密度(即每P个RE中有一个RE映射DMRS)，P为正整数。当该PSSCH DMRS与该PSCCH在时域上无重叠时，第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000159
满足如下公式(3-2)；当PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH在时域上重叠时，第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000160
满足如下公式(3-3)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000161
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000162
其中，P可以为常数，比如，P可以等于2、3、4等，P的具体数值可以事先设置。在P＝2的情况下，当PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH在时域上无重叠时，第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000163
满足如下公式(3-4)；当PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH在时域上重叠时，第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的第一开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000164
满足如下公式(3-5)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000165
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000166
需要说明的是，第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH在时域上重叠的一种示例可以参见图3中的(a)所示，PSSCH DMRS与PSCCH在时域上无重叠的一种示例可以参见图3中的(b)所示。
S402：根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。
其中，用于传输数据的RE中的数据是指传输块TB的数据，该数据不包括控制信息、DMRS和其他参考信号等。第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量可以是指第一时频资源中承载的数据占用的RE数量，也可以称为第一时频资源中的可用RE数量。当确定第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第二开销时，可以根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。
可选的，第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：一个PRB包括的子载波数量，第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，第一时频资源中PSSCH包括的PRB数量，第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。
其中，PSCCH可用于承载第一控制信息，具体可以包括侧行数据信道的物理层资源信息、DMRS配置信息、DMRS端口数、MCS和第二控制信息的格式等解调信息。PSSCH可用于承载数据信息和第二控制信息，第二控制信息主要用于承载除该PSSCH  DMRS以外的其他控制信息，具体可以包括CSI上报触发信息，PSSCH的目的用户的IP，PSSCH HARQ进程号，新传数据指示(new data indicator)，HARQ传输版本号等信息。
另外，PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销可以是指PTRS和/或CSI-RS占用的平均RE数量。第一控制信息的开销可以是指第一控制信息占用的平均RE数量，或者第一控制信息占用的RE数量。第二控制信息的开销可以是指第二控制信息占用的平均RE数量。PTRS和/或CSI-RS、第一控制信息和第二控制信息分别占用的平均RE数量也可以称为占用的RE数量。
再者，第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量可以是预配置的，或者是由网络侧设备配置的。其中，第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量可以是指第一时间单元内排除以下符号的符号数量：PSCCH的符号，PSFCH的符号，自动增益控制(AGC)符号，最后一个间隔(GAP)符号。其中第一时间单元内的AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。
具体的，若
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000167
表示一个PRB包括的子载波数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000168
表示第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，x表示一个PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000169
表示PSSCH包括的PRB的数量，N SCI1表示第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，N SCI2表示第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量N RE满足如下公式(3-6)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000170
进一步的，若一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量存在上限，且Q表示一个PRB中用于确定TBS的RE数量的上限，则第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000171
满足如下公式(3-7)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000172
公式(3-7)中的N RE满足上述公式(1-3)。其中，Q为正整数，比如，Q可以等于132、144或者156；或者，Q＝12*(N sym-a)，a的取值范围为1、2、3等整数，N sym表示第一时间单元包含的符号数量(也可以称为第一时间单元包含的符号长度)，a表示第一时间单元内的符号开销，可以包含AGC符号、最后一个GAP符号等至少一个。
S403：根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，确定PSSCH的TBS。
具体的，当确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量时，可以根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量、以及编码调制信号(MCS)和目标码率的对照表确定PSSCH的TBS。其中，MCS和目标码率的对照表可以如下表1所示，包括不同MCS索引对应的调制阶数、目标码率和频谱效率。
需要说明的是，步骤S403中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法与现有NR系统中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法一致，具体可以参见相关技术中的描述，本申请实施例在此不再赘述。
可选地，该方法还可以包括：发送端根据该TBS，发送传输块。相应地，接收端根据该TBS，接收该传输块，即接收端对该传输块进行信道译码。
在本申请实施例中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以先确定第一 时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的第二开销，并根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量。由于该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销为多个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量，而不是单次传输时PSSCH DMRS占用的实际RE数量，所以针对于初传和重传，根据该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量是不变的，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定的TBS是相同的。因此，本申请实施例提供的方法可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
此外，本申请在确定TBS时，是根据第一时频资源中多个DMRS配置下该PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数量确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以本申请实施例可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量。另外，通过设置不同的DMRS符号数量，可以在信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio，SINR)降低时增加DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH译码效率，或者在SINR提升时减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH信道吞吐量。
上述图2-图5提供的方案，在一个数据包的初次传输和重复传输中支持不同DMRS符号数量的DMRS配置的，这样可确保在数据初传和重传的过程中如果信道状态发生变换时，可以通过增加解调参考信号的时域密度，来提高信道估计准确性，进而确保传输可靠性保证。此时基于本申请的方案，即使在DMRS符号数量可变的情况下，仍然能够确保分配给PSSCH的RE数量不变，进而保证初传和重传的数据传输块尺寸不变，这样就能进行多次传输的物理层合并，获得传输合并增益。进一步的，通过考虑PSSCH DMRS符号和PSCCH在PRB上是否有重叠，可以在满足PSSCH DMRS映射的同时，进一步精确估计PSSCH分配到的RE数量，达到预设的PSSCH传输码率的目的，降低由于传输码率过低带来的资源浪费或者码率过高带来的传输不可靠性。
图6为本申请实施例提供的又一种传输块尺寸确定方法的流程示意图，该方法可应用于包括发送端和接收端的通信系统中，发送端和接收端可以为通过D2D方式通信的两个终端设备，例如发送端可以称为第一终端设备，接收端可以称为第二终端设备。下面对该方法中的各步骤进行详细说明。
S501：第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子(expansion factor)，第二指示信息用于指示PSSCH DMRS的开销。
S502：第二终端设备接收来自第一终端设备的第一指示信息和/或第二指示信息，第一指示信息用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子，第二指示信息用于指示PSSCH DMRS的开销。
其中，在上述S501和S502中，PSSCH可用于承载数据信息和第二控制信息，第二控制信息主要用于承载除PSSCH DMRS以外的其他控制信息，具体可以包括CSI上报触发信息，PSSCH的目的用户的IP，PSSCH HARQ进程号，新传数据指示(new data indicator)，HARQ传输版本号等信息。第一指示信息指示的第二控制信息的调整因子可用于确定第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。第二控制信息的开销具体可以是指第二控制信息在第一时频资源中占用的RE数量。第二指示信息指示的PSSCH DMRS的开销具体可以是指第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的开销，即PSSCH DMRS 在第一时频资源中占用的平均RE数量。
另外，第一时频资源是用于侧行链路通信的时频资源，该时频资源可以包括时域资源和频域资源。第一时频资源在时域上可以包括第一时间单元，第一时间单元可以包括多个符号，第一时间单元可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，网络侧设备可以通过配置这多个符号中的第一个起始符号和这多个符号的数量来配置第一时间单元。第一时频资源在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，每个子信道可以包括频域上连续的多个PRB，这一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，对于任意一个子信道，网络侧设备可以配置该子信道包括的多个PRB中的第一个PRB的序号和该子信道包括的PRB的数量来配置该子信道。其中，PSSCH和该PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。在第一时频资源中，PSSCH DMRS和PSCCH在时域上可以重叠，也可以不重叠。
可选的，第一指示信息可以携带在第一控制信息中，第二指示信息也可以携带在第一控制信息中，第一控制信息为PSCCH承载的控制信息。其中，第一指示信息可以占用第一控制信息的至少一个比特，比如，第一指示信息可以是1比特(bit)，也可以是2比特(bits)。第二指示信息也可以占用第一控制信息的至少一个比特，比如，第二指示信息可以是1比特，也可以是2比特。本申请实施例对第一指示信息和第二指示信息占用的比特数量不作具体限制。可选的，第一指示信息和第二指示信息也可以通过RRC携带。当PSSCH DMRS的配置集合内只有一个DMRS时域图样的配置时，第二指示信息可以不存在。
下面分别对第一指示信息和第二指示信息的指示方法进行介绍说明。
对于第一指示信息：在一种可能的实施例中，第一指示信指示的第二控制信息的调整因子等于第一控制信息中携带的调整因子β，也可以理解为：第一指示信息用于指示根据第一控制信息携带的调整因子β确定第二控制信息的开销；进一步的，第一指示信指示还可以用于指示初传和重传的第一控制信息中携带的调整因子相同。
或者，第一指示信指示的第二控制信息的调整因子等于配置的至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000173
也可以理解为：第一指示信息用于指示根据配置的至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000174
确定第二控制信息的开销；进一步的，第一指示信指示还可以用于指示初传和重传的第一控制信息中携带的调整因子不同。其中，至少一个调整因子可以包括一个或者多个调整因子，且至少一个调整因子可以由网络侧设备配置或者预配置，比如，至少一个调整因子可以包括四个调整因子，且分别表示为β 1、β 2、β 3和β 4，平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000175
可以是这四个调整因子(即β 1、β 2、β 3和β 4)的平均值。
示例性的，假设第一指示信息为1比特：当该1比特的值为0时可用于指示初传和重传的第一控制信息携带的调整因子相同，且第一指示信息指示的第二控制信息的调整因子等于第一控制信息中携带的调整因子β；当该1比特的值为1时可用于指示初传和重传的第一控制信息携带的调整因子不同，且第一指示信息指示的第二控制信息的调整因子等于至少一个调整因子的平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000176
反之亦然。
需要说明的是，该平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000177
可以是至少一个调整因子之和与至少一个调整因子的数量的比值；或者，该平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000178
可以是该比值向上取整得到的；或者，该平均值
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000179
可以是该比值向下取整得到的。本申请实施例对此不作具体限制。
对于第一指示信息：在另一种可能的实施例中，第一指示信息为第二控制信息的调整因子β'，也即是，第一指示信息用于显式指示第二控制信息的调整因子β'，第一指示信息具体可以为第二控制信息的调整因子β'的索引值。可选的，β'为正整数，且β'可以是配置的第二控制信息对应的调整因子集合中的任意一个；或者，β'大于或等于该调整因子集合中的最小值且小于或等于该调整因子集合中的最大值。其中，该调整因子集合可以是由网络侧设备配置或者预配置的，且该调整因子集合中可以包括至少两个调整因子，比如，该调整因子集合中可以包括四个调整因子，且具体可以为{β 1，β 2，β 3，β 4}。
示例性的，假设第一指示信息为2比特，该调整因子集合为{β 1，β 2，β 3，β 4}，若这四个调整因子对应的索引值依次为00、01、10和11，则：当该2比特的值为00时，第一指示信息具体用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子β'为β 1；当该2比特的值为01时，第一指示信息具体用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子β'为β 2；当该2比特的值为10时，第一指示信息具体用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子β'为β 3；当该2比特的值为11时，第一指示信息具体用于指示第二控制信息的调整因子β'为β 4。或者，假设第一指示信息为3比特，该调整因子集合{β 1，β 2，β 3，β 4}中的最小值为β 1且最大值为β 4，最小值β 1至最大值β 4共包括6个正整数，这6个正整数可以分别对应一个3比特的索引值，比如，这6个正整数对应的索引值可以依次为001、010、011、100、101和110，则第一指示信息可以通过不同的索引值来指示对应的正整数作为第二控制信息的调整因子β'。
对于第二指示信息：在一种可能的实施例中，第二指示信息用于指示根据第一控制信息中携带的DMRS符号数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销；或者，第二指示信息用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS的开销(也可以称为第一开销或者占用的平均RE数量)确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销(也可以称为第二开销，第二开销可以是多个第一开销的平均值)。
示例性的，第二指示信息为1比特，当该1比特的值为0时可用于指示根据第一控制信息中携带的DMRS符号数量确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销，当该1比特的值为1时可用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销。
其中，至少一个DMRS配置可以是指第一时频资源对应的至少一个DMRS配置，可以是由网络侧设备配置或者预配置给第一时频资源的。至少一个DMRS配置可以包括一个或者多个DMRS配置，每个DMRS配置下对应设置有一定DMRS符号数量，该DMRS符号可以是指DMRS占用的符号或者用于传输DMRS的符号。比如，至少一个DMRS配置为{2,3,4}，则至少一个DMRS配置包括3个DMRS配置。其中，DMRS配置为{2}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为2；DMRS配置{3}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为3；DMRS配置{4}表示对应的DMRS符号数量为4。
另外，每个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS的开销可以称为PSSCH DMRS的第一开销，根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的PSSCH DMRS的开销可以称为PSSCH DMRS的第二开销。该PSSCH DMRS的第二开销可以是指至少一个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS的第一开销的平均值。
S503：第一终端设备根据第二控制信息的调整因子和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定PSSCH的TBS。其中，S503位于S501之后且与S502不分先后顺序，即S503可以位于S502之后，也可以位于S502之前，图6中以S503位于S502之后为例进行说明。
当第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第一指示信息时，第一终端设备可以根据第一指示信息中指示的第二控制信息的调整因子，确定第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。和/或，当第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送第二指示信息时，第一终端设备可以确定第二指示信息中指示的该PSSCH DMRS的开销。之后，第一终端设备可以根据第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，和/或第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定PSSCH的TBS。
S504：第二终端设备根据第二控制信息的调整因子和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定PSSCH的TBS。其中，S504位于S502之后且与S503不分先后顺序，即S504可以位于S503之后，也可以位于S503之前，图6中以S504位于S503之后为例进行说明。
当第二终端设备接收到第一指示信息时，第二终端设备可以根据第一指示信息确定第二控制信息的调整因子，并根据第二控制信息的调整因子确定第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销。当第二终端设备接收到第二指示信息时，第二终端设备可以根据第二指示信息确定第二指示信息指示的该PSSCH DMRS的开销，即第一时频资源中PSSCH DMRS的开销。之后，第二终端设备可以根据第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，和/或第一时频资源中该PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定PSSCH的TBS。
需要说明的是，在上述S503和S504中，根据第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，从而根据用于传输数据的RE数量确定PSSCH的TBS的具体方法与现有NR系统中确定PSSCH的TBS的方法一致，具体可以参见相关技术中的描述，本申请实施例在此不再赘述。
可选地，该方法还可以包括：第一终端设备根据该TBS，发送传输块。相应地，第二终端设备根据该TBS，接收该传输块，即第二终端设备对该传输块进行信道译码。
在本申请实施例中，当第一时频资源对应的DMRS配置集合包括不同DMRS符号数量的DMRS配置，或者存在多个第二控制信息的调整因子的配置时，支持在PSSCH初传和重传过程中灵活使用各种配置。同时，该方法可以使得发送端和接收端在确定TBS时，保证确定的第二控制信息的开销，和/或该PSSCH DMRS的开销相同，从而可以保证发送端和接收端确定的TBS是一致的。另外，当第二指示信息用于指示根据至少一个DMRS配置下的PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的该PSSCH DMRS的开销时，由于该PSSCH DMRS的开销为至少一个DMRS配置下PSSCH DMRS占用的平均RE数 量，而不是单次传输时PSSCH DMRS占用的实际RE数量，所以针对于初传和重传，根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的TBS是相同的。因此，本申请实施例提供的方法可以实现侧行链路通信过程中的初传和重传的传输块合并，以实现合并增益。
此外，本申请在确定TBS时，是根据该PSSCH DMRS的开销确定的用于传输数据的RE数量，所以本申请实施例可以允许PSSCH针对一个TBS的初传和重传过程中携带不同的DMRS符号数量。另外，通过设置不同的DMRS符号数量，可以在信号与干扰加噪声比(SINR)降低时增加DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH译码效率，或者在SINR提升时减少DMRS符号数量来提升PSSCH信道吞吐量。
上述图6提供的技术方案，支持发送端通过第一控制信息或者RRC配置信息告知接收端PSSCH DMRS的开销的确定方法，即PSSCH DMRS的开销由本次DMRS的使用RE数量确定，还是按照解DMRS配置集合内的所有DMRS配置确定。这样就给发送端提供了一种选择PSSCH DMRS的开销自由度。考虑PSSCH链路的信道状态不同，一个资源池上可能会配置不同的DMRS配置，以确保译码可靠性。当通信双方距离较近、信道条件良好时，其PSSCH DMRS的开销可以固定在一个较小值(比如包含两个DMRS符号的DMRS配置)，如果按照DMRS配置集合内的所有DMRS配置确定PSSCH DMRS的开销，就会造成PSSCH实际分配到的RE数量偏低，本申请支持发送端通过告知接收端PSSCH DMRS的开销的确定方法，从而给发送端提供了一种选择PSSCH DMRS的开销的自由度。同样的，与PSSCH DMRS的配置类似，PSSCH中第二控制信息的调整因子会有多个配置，具体的发送端在一次数据传输携带的第一控制信息中指示第二控制信息具体使用的调整因子，考虑初传和重传的信道状态不同，可以根据信道状态调整第一控制信息中携带的第二控制信息的调整因子数值。当信道条件变差时，提高所述调整因子的数值大小，使得第二控制信息的传输码率降低，提高第二控制信息的传输可靠性；当信道条件变好时，减小所述调整因子的数值大小，减小第二控制信息占用的RE数量，达到提升PSSCH占用RE数量的目的，进而提升系统吞吐量。
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种PSSCH DMRS的符号确定方法的流程示意图，该方法可应用于发送端，也可应用于接收端。发送端和接收端可以为通过D2D方式通信的两个终端设备，例如发送端可以称为第一终端设备，接收端可以称为第二终端设备。下面对该方法中的各步骤进行详细说明。
S601：根据第一时频资源中的PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号数量、以及PSSCH的参考符号数量，确定该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中的符号映射位置。
其中，第一时频资源是用于侧行链路通信的时频资源，该时频资源可以包括时域资源和频域资源。第一时频资源在时域上可以包括第一时间单元，第一时间单元可以包括多个符号，第一时间单元可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，网络侧设备可以通过配置这多个符号中的第一个起始符号和这多个符号的数量来配置第一时间单元。第一时频资源在频域上可以包括一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，每个子信道可以包括频域上连续的多个PRB，这一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道可以由网络侧设备配置，比如，对于任意一个子信道，网络侧设备可以配置该子信道包括的多个PRB中的第一个PRB的序号和该子信道包括的PRB的数量来配置该子信道。其中，PSSCH和该 PSSCH DMRS可以占用上述一个子信道或者连续的多个子信道，PSCCH可以占用一个子信道内连续的多个PRB。在第一时频资源中，PSSCH DMRS和PSCCH在时域上可以重叠，也可以不重叠。
另外，第一时频资源中的PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号数量可以是指该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中占用的符号数量，或者第一时频资源中用于映射PSSCH DMRS的符号数量。该DMRS符号数量可以由网络侧设备配置或者预配置，且所述第一终端设备在第一控制信息中携带本次数据发送使用的DMRS符号数量，比如，第一时频资源中的PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号数量可以为2、3或者4等，本申请实施例对此不作具体限制。
再者，该参考符号数量可以为第一时间单元内排除以下符号开销的符号数量，也即是，第一时间单元包含的符号数量减去以下符号开销的符号数量：PSCCH的符号开销，PSFCH的符号开销，AGC符号开销，第一时间单元内最后一个GAP符号开销。其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。
上述第一时间单元包含的符号数量可以是网络侧设备配置或者与配置的。PSCCH的符号开销也可以是网络侧设备配置或者与配置的。PSFCH的符号开销与PSFCH的反馈配置周期信息有关。对于PSFCH的符号开销，若PSFCH的反馈配置周期表示为W，PSFCH和PSFCH的保护间隔包含的符号数量表示为Z，则PSFCH的符号开销
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000180
满足：当W不为0时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000181
且Z＝3，或者
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000182
表示向上取整；当W为0时，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000183
可选的，该参考符号数量可以是网络侧设备配置或者预配置的，比如，该参考符号数量可以预配置在第一时频资源所在的资源池中。或者，该参考符号数量由第一配置信息确定，第一配置信息包括以下至少一项：第一时间单元包含的符号数量，PSFCH的反馈配置周期信息，PSFCH和PSFCH的保护间隔包含的符号数量，PSSCH包括的PRB数量与PSCCH包括的PRB数量的关系。其中，PSSCH包括的PRB数量与PSCCH包括的PRB数量的关系具体可以包括：PSSCH包括的PRB数量与PSCCH包括的PRB数量相等或不相等。PSSCH包括的PRB数量与PSCCH包括的PRB数量的关系也可以理解为PSSCH带宽与PSCCH带宽的关系，即PSSCH带宽与PSCCH带宽相等或不相等。
在一种可能的实施例中，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与该PSCCH包括的PRB数量不相等时，若
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000184
表示第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔GAP符号和/或AGC符号数量，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000185
表示PSFCH的符号开销，则该参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000186
满足如下公式(3-1)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000187
其中，AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。示例性的，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与该PSCCH包括的PRB数量不相等时，该参考符号数量受该PSFCH的符号开销的影响，这里的PSFCH的符号开销是指PSFCH和PSFCH的保护间隔共占用的符号数量。相应的，根据该参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000188
该PSCCH符号数量和第一控制信息中携带本次数据发送使用的PSSCH DMRS符号数量，按照下述表3确定第一时间单元上PSSCH DMRS的相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000189
最后确定该PSSCH DMRS 在一个时隙中的符号映射位置为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000190
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000191
表示第一时间单元的起始符号位置。其中，上述该第一时间单元上PSSCH DMRS的相对位置可以是指该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上相对于起始符号位置的符号位置。
表3
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000192
需要说明的是，上述表3为本申请实施例提供的一种该PSSCH DMRS的符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置。在表3中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000193
in symbols表示PSSCH的参考符号数量，DM-RS positon
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000194
表示该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置，PSCCH duration 2 symbols表示PSCCH的符号开销为2个符号，PSCCH duration 3 symbols表示PSCCH的符号开销为3个符号，Number of PSSCH DM-RS表示该PSSCH DMRS的符号开销。
如图8中的(a)所示，第一时间单元包含14个符号，即第一时间单元包含一个时隙中从sym0至sym13的符号。当PSFCH的配置周期W为0，即所有侧行链路的帧结构如图8中的(a)所示，则PSFCH的符号开销为0时，该参考符号数量为第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔符号和AGC的Y个符号的符号数量，其中Y＝1。根据上述参数可以确定该参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000195
为12。当该PSFCH的配置周期W为2，即该PSFCH的符号开销为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000196
时，当侧行链路的帧结构如图8中的(a)和(b)所示，该参考符号数量为第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔符号和AGC的Y个符号后，减去该PSFCH的符号开销，其中Y＝1。根据上述参数可以确定该参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000197
为10。假设PSCCH的符号数量是2，那么按照上述表3可知，所述参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000198
为10的PSSCH DMRS时域图样有两个，即{3,8}和{1,4,7}。当第一控制信息中指示的PSSCH DMRS的时域符号数量是2时，所述相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000199
为3和8；当第一控制信息中指示的PSSCH DMRS的时域符号数量是3时，所述相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000200
为1、4、7。由于侧行链路的第一时间单元占用该时隙全部14个符号，则配置的起始符号位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000201
为0。当PSCCH的符号数量是2时，所述相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000202
为3和8，即PSSCH DMRS在一个 时隙中的符号映射位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000203
为sym3和sym8。需要说明的是，AGC符号的数量可以是一个或者多个，图8中以一个AGC符号为例进行说明。
在另一种可能的实施例中，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与该PSCCH包括的PRB数量相等时，若
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000204
表示第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔GAP符号的符号数量和AGC符号，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000205
表示PSFCH的符号开销，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000206
表示该PSCCH的符号开销，则参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000207
满足如下公式(3-2)。
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000208
其中AGC符号为第一时间单元内的前Y个符号，Y为自然数，比如1，2或3。
示例性的，当该PSSCH包括的PRB数量与该PSCCH包括的PRB数量相等时，该参考符号数量受PSFCH的符号开销和PSCCH的符号开销的影响。相应的，根据该参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000209
PSCCH符号数量和第一控制信息中携带本次数据发送使用的PSSCH DMRS符号数量，按照上述表3确定第一时间单元上PSSCH DMRS的相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000210
最后确定该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000211
其中，
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000212
表示第一时间单元的起始符号位置。
其中，上述该第一时间单元上PSSCH DMRS的相对位置可以是指该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上相对于起始符号位置的符号位置。
如图9中的(a)所示，第一时间单元包含14个符号，即包含一个时隙中从sym0至sym13的符号。当PSFCH的配置周期W为0，即所有侧行链路的帧结构如图9中的(a)所示，则PSFCH的符号开销为0，且当PSCCH的符号开销为2时，该参考符号数量为第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔符号和AGC符号(第一时间单元内的AGC符号数量Y＝1)后，减去PSCCH的符号开销后得到的符号数量。根据上述参数确定该参考符号数量为10。当PSFCH的配置周期W为2，即该PSFCH的符号开销为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000213
时，且当侧行链路的帧结构如图9中的(a)和(b)所示，PSCCH的符号开销为2时，该参考符号数量为第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔符号和AGC的一个符号(Y＝1)后，减去PSFCH的符号开销和PSCCH的符号开销后得到的符号数量。根据上述参数确定该参考符号数量为8。由上述表3可知，当PSCCH的符号数量为2时，所述参考符号数量
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000214
为8的PSSCH DMRS时域图样只有一个{1,5}，即PSSCH DMRS的符号数量是2，所述相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000215
为1和5。由于侧行链路的第一时间单元占用该时隙全部14个符号，则配置的起始符号位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000216
为0。当PSCCH的符号数量是2时，所述相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000217
为1和5，即PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000218
为sym3和sym8。需要说明的是，AGC符号的数量可以是一个或者多个，图9中以一个AGC符号为例进行说明。
可选的，当该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置超出该PSSCH的包含符号时，超出的符号映射位置不映射该PSSCH DMRS。示例性的，当PSFCH的配置周期W为4，即PSFCH的符号开销为
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000219
时，如图8中的(a)和(b)所示的侧行链路的PSSCH参考符号数量为第一时间单元内排除的最后一个间隔符号和Y个AGC符号后，减去PSFCH的符号开销后得到的符号数量，其中Y＝1。根据上述参数确定该参考符号数量为11。此时若所述第一控制信息中指示的PSSCH DMRS的时域符号数量 是4时，所述相对位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000220
为1、4、7、11。由于侧行链路的第一时间单元占用该时隙全部14个符号，则配置的起始符号位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000221
为0，即PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置
Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-000222
为sym1、sym4、sym7和sym11。针对如图8中的(a)所示的时隙，PSSCH DMRS可以映射在sym1、sym4、sym7和sym11上；但是针对如图8中的(b)所示的时隙，PSSCH DMRS可以映射在sym1、sym4、sym7上，但是由于PSFCH占用部分符号，sym11上不能再映射PSSCH DMRS。因此，sym11上不映射该PSSCH DMRS，或者说sym11的PSSCH DMRS被打掉了，或者说sym11的PSSCH DMRS不再被映射了。
进一步的，该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中的符号映射位置还与PSCCH的符号开销有关。可选的，该PSCCH的符号开销为2，即该PSCCH占用第一时间单元中的2个符号；或者，该PSCCH的符号开销为3，即该PSCCH占用第一时间单元中的3个符号。
在本申请实施例中，对于数据的初传或重传，发送端和接收端均可以根据第一时频资源中的PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号数量、以及PSSCH的参考符号数量，确定该PSSCH DMRS在第一时频资源中的符号映射位置，从而使得发送端和接收端可以快速、高效地确定该PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置。同时，该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置可以是由第一时间单元的起始符号位置、该PSSCH DMRS的DMRS符号在第一时间单元上的相对位置，这样可以使得该PSSCH DMRS在一个时隙中的符号映射位置从首个符号位置开始，从而大大提高了译码效率。
上述图7提供的方案中，支持利用第一时间单元中PSSCH的参考符号数量确定PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置。现有技术中PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置由PSSCH和PSCCH包含的总的符号数量确定，这会导致两个问题。第一问题是当PSSCH和PSCCH包含的PRB数量相同时，由PSSCH和PSCCH总共的符号数量确定的PSSCH DMRS符号映射无法工作；第二个问题是由于PSFCH信道的存在，导致在不同第一时间单元内PSSCH和PSCCH的总的符号数量不同，这会导致在一个数据的初传和重传时计算TBS的过程中，PSSCH DMRS的开销不同，导致TBS的大小不同，进而无法进行重传合并。本申请实施例根据PSSCH的参考符号数量确定PSSCH DMRS的符号映射位置。由于PSFCH符号数量和PSCCH符号数量在一个资源池中是固定配置的，对接收端和发送端都是已知信息，那么本申请定义的PSSCH参考符号数量就是第一时间单元包含符号数量排除PSFCH占用的符号数量的影响、排除第一时间单元内AGC符号和最后一个GAP符号的影响，同时根据PSSCH和PSCCH包含的PRB数量的关系，排除PSCCH的影响，确定的参数。这样一方面可以保证现有的PSSCH DMRS时域图样配置表格在PSSCH和PSCCH带宽相同时可以工作，另外一方面保证了PSSCH DMRS时域图样包含的符号数量的使用场景不受PSFCH存在的影响。
上述主要从终端设备的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是，终端设备(比如，第一终端设备或第二终端设备)为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的网元及算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方 式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对终端设备进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，图10示出了本申请实施例中所涉及的传输块尺寸确定装置的一种可能的结构示意图，该装置可以作为终端设备或者终端设备内置的芯片，该终端设备可以为第一终端设备或者第二终端设备。该装置包括：处理单元701。进一步，该装置还包括发送单元702和接收单元703。
在一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元701可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S201、S202和S203，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。进一步的，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第二终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息，比如，发送单元702可用于支持该装置根据S203确定的TBS向第二终端设备发送该传输块；当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，接收单元703可用于支持该装置接收来自第一终端设备或网络侧设备的信息，比如，接收单元703可用于支持该装置根据S203确定的TBS接收来自第一终端设备的该传输块，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第二终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元701可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S301、S302和S303，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。进一步的，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第二终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息，比如，根据S303确定的TBS向第二终端设备发送该传输块；当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第一终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息，接收单元703可用于支持该装置接收来自第一终端设备或网络侧设备的信息，比如，接收单元703可用于支持该装置根据S303确定的TBS接收来自第一终端设备的该传输块。
在又一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元701可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S400、S401、S402和S403，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。进一步的，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第二终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息，比如，根据S403确定的TBS向第二终端设备发送该传输块；当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第一终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息，接收单元703可用于支持该装置接收来自第一终端设备或网络侧设备的信息，比如，接收单元703可用于支持该装置根据S403确定的TBS接收来自第一终端设备的该传输块。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S501，处理单元701 可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S503，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程；进一步的，发送单元702还可以用于根据S503确定的TBS向第二终端设备发送该传输块。当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，接收单元703可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S502，处理单元701可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S504，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程；进一步的，接收单元703还可以用于根据S504确定的TBS接收来自第一终端设备发送的该传输块。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，处理单元701可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S601，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。进一步的，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第二终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息，接收单元703可用于支持该装置接收来自第二终端设备或网络侧设备的信息；当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，接收单元703可用于支持该装置接收来自第一终端设备或网络侧设备的信息，发送单元702可用于支持该装置向第一终端设备或网络侧设备发送信息。
需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。
在采用硬件实现的基础上，本申请实施例中的处理单元701可以为该装置的处理器，发送单元702可以为该装置的发送器，接收单元703可以为该装置的接收器，发送器通常可以和接收器集成在一起用作收发器，具体的收发器还可以称为通信接口。
如图11所示，为本申请实施例提供的上述实施例所涉及的传输块尺寸确定装置的另一种可能的结构示意图，该装置可以作为终端设备或者终端设备内置的芯片，该终端设备可以为第一终端设备或者第二终端设备。该装置包括：处理器801，还可以包括存储器802、通信接口803和总线804，处理器801、存储器802和通信接口803通过总线804连接。
其中，处理器801用于对该装置的动作进行控制管理。在一种可能的实现方式中，处理器801可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S201、S202和S203，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。在另一种可能的实现方式中，处理器801可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S301、S302和S303，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。在又一种可能的实现方式中，处理器801可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S400、S401、S402和S403，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。在另一种可能的实现方式中，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，处理器801可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S503；当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，处理器801可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S504。在又一种可能的实现方式中，处理器801可用于支持该装置执行上述方法实施例中的S601，和/或本文所描述的技术的其他过程。
另外，通信接口803用于支持该装置进行通信。在一种可能的实现方式中，当该装置为第一终端设备或者第一终端设备内置的芯片时，通信接口803可用于支持该装置与网络侧设备或者第二终端设备进行通信。在另一种可能的实现方式中，当该装置为第二终端设备或者第二终端设备内置的芯片时，通信接口803可用于支持该装置与网络侧设备或者第一终端设备进行通信。存储器802用于存储该装置的程序代码和数 据。
在本申请中，处理器801可以是中央处理器单元，通用处理器，数字信号处理器，专用集成电路，现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，数字信号处理器和微处理器的组合等等。上述图11中的总线804可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect，PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture，EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，上述图11中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
基于此，本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，该通信系统包括网络设备、第一终端设备和第二终端设备；其中，第一终端设备为上述图10或图11所提供的传输块尺寸确定装置，用于执行上述图2、图4、图5、图6或图7所示的方法实施例中第一终端设备的步骤；第二终端设备为上述图10或图11所提供的传输块尺寸确定装置，用于执行上述图2、图4、图5、图6或图7所示的方法实施例中的第二终端设备的步骤。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中，该可读存储介质可以包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图2所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图4所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中 存储有指令，当该指令在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图5所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中的第一终端设备的步骤。在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中的第二终端设备的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令，当该指令在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图7所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图2所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图4所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图5所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中的第一终端设备步骤。在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图6所示的方法实施例中的第二终端设备的步骤。
在本申请的又一方面，提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在设备上运行时，使得该设备执行上述图7所示的方法实施例中的步骤。
最后应说明的是：以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (15)

  1. 一种传输块尺寸确定方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    确定第一时频资源的一个物理资源块PRB中侧行数据信道解调参考信号PSSCH DMRS的开销，所述PSSCH DMRS用于解调侧行数据信道PSSCH；
    根据所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定所述第一时频资源中分配给所述PSSCH的资源元素RE数量，所述RE数量用于确定所述PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述确定所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，包括：
    根据解调参考信号DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，确定所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，所述DMRS配置集合是所述第一时频资源所在的资源池上的DMRS配置集合。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述DMRS配置集合由网络侧设备配置。
  4. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述PSSCH DMRS的开销
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100001
    满足：
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100002
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时频资源中分配给所述PSSCH的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：
    一个所述PRB包括的子载波数量，
    一个所述PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，所述第一时间单元为所述第一时频资源的时域长度，
    一个所述PRB中相位追踪参考信号PTRS和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的开销，
    所述PSSCH包括的PRB数量，所述PSSCH包括的PRB数量与所述第一时频资源包括的PRB数量相同，
    所述第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，所述第一控制信息承载于侧行控制信道PSCCH，
    所述第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，所述第二控制信息承载于PSSCH。
  6. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量满足：
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100003
    其中，N RE表示所述第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100004
    表示一个所述PRB包括的子载波数量，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100005
    表示一个所述PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，所述第一时间单元为所述第一时频资源的时域长度，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100006
    表示一个所述PRB中所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，x表示一个所述PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100007
    表示所述PSSCH包括的所述PRB数量，所述PSSCH包括的PRB数量与所述第一时频资源包括的PRB数量相同，N SCI1表示所述第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，所述第一控制信息承载于PSCCH，N SCI2表示所述第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，所述第二控制信息承载于PSSCH。
  7. 一种传输块尺寸确定装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括：
    处理单元，用于确定第一时频资源的一个物理资源块PRB中侧行数据信道解调参考信号PSSCH DMRS的开销，所述PSSCH DMRS用于解调侧行数据信道PSSCH；
    所述处理单元，还用于根据所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，确定所述第一时频资源中分配给所述PSSCH的资源元素RE数量，所述RE数量用于确定所述PSSCH的传输块尺寸TBS。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    根据解调参考信号DMRS配置集合内的每个DMRS配置下的DMRS符号数量，确定所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，所述DMRS配置集合是所述第一时频资源所在的资源池上的DMRS配置集合。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述DMRS配置集合由网络侧设备配置。
  10. 根据权利要求8或9所述的装置，其特征在于，所述PSSCH DMRS的开销
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100008
    满足：
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100009
  11. 根据权利要求7-10任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一时频资源中分配给所述PSSCH的RE数量还与以下至少一项有关：
    一个所述PRB包括的子载波数量，
    一个所述PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，所述第一时间单元为所述第一时频资源的时域长度，
    一个所述PRB中相位追踪参考信号PTRS和/或信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS的开销，
    所述PSSCH包括的PRB数量，所述PSSCH包括的PRB数量与所述第一时频资源包括的PRB数量相同，
    所述第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，所述第一控制信息承载于侧行控制信道PSCCH，
    所述第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，所述第二控制信息承载于PSSCH。
  12. 根据权利要求7-11任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一时频资源中分配给所述PSSCH的RE数量满足：
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100010
    其中，N RE表示所述第一时频资源中用于传输数据的RE数量，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100011
    表示一个所述PRB包括的子载波数量，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100012
    表示一个所述PRB在第一时间单元内PSSCH的参考符号数量，所述第一时间单元为所述第一时频资源的时域长度，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100013
    表示一个所述PRB中所述PSSCH DMRS的开销，x表示一个所述PRB中PTRS和/或CSI-RS的开销，
    Figure PCTCN2021085732-appb-100014
    表示所述PSSCH包括的所述PRB数量，所述PSSCH包括的PRB数量与所述第一时频资源包括的PRB数量相同，N SCI1表示所述第一时频资源中第一控制信息的开销，所述第一控制信息承载于PSCCH，N SCI2表示所述第一时频资源中第二控制信息的开销，所述第二控制信息承载于PSSCH。
  13. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置包括处理器和存储器，所述存储器中存储所述处理器上运行的程序，所述处理器执行所述程序时实现如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法。
  14. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：处理器和接口电路；
    所述接口电路，用于接收代码指令并传输至所述处理器；
    所述处理器，用于运行所述代码指令以执行如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法。
  15. 一种可读存储介质，存储有指令，当所述指令被执行时，使如权利要求1-6中任一项所述的方法被实现。
PCT/CN2021/085732 2020-04-10 2021-04-06 一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置 Ceased WO2021204128A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21785577.4A EP4132171A4 (en) 2020-04-10 2021-04-06 METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING THE TRANSPORT BLOCK SIZE
US17/961,386 US12402104B2 (en) 2020-04-10 2022-10-06 Method and apparatus for determining transport block size

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010281605.8A CN113543314A (zh) 2020-04-10 2020-04-10 一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置
CN202010281605.8 2020-04-10

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/961,386 Continuation US12402104B2 (en) 2020-04-10 2022-10-06 Method and apparatus for determining transport block size

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021204128A1 true WO2021204128A1 (zh) 2021-10-14

Family

ID=75570945

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/085732 Ceased WO2021204128A1 (zh) 2020-04-10 2021-04-06 一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US12402104B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP4132171A4 (zh)
CN (2) CN113543314A (zh)
WO (1) WO2021204128A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2025539245A (ja) * 2022-11-02 2025-12-04 日本電気株式会社 端末装置及び端末装置によって実行される方法

Families Citing this family (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12538271B2 (en) * 2020-08-26 2026-01-27 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for determining resource, and storage medium
WO2022078606A1 (en) * 2020-10-15 2022-04-21 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Determining similarity between channel estimations
WO2022185853A1 (ja) * 2021-03-01 2022-09-09 ソニーグループ株式会社 端末装置、基地局装置及び通信方法
US12369174B2 (en) * 2022-03-01 2025-07-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Continuous transmission grants in sidelink communication networks
WO2024059984A1 (zh) * 2022-09-19 2024-03-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 传输块大小的确定方法、装置、设备及存储介质
EP4614897A4 (en) * 2022-11-03 2026-03-18 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd LATERAL LINK TRANSMISSION METHOD AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
CN117998592A (zh) * 2022-11-04 2024-05-07 华为技术有限公司 一种tbs确定方法、装置及存储介质
CN118041497A (zh) * 2022-11-04 2024-05-14 维沃移动通信有限公司 传输方法、用户设备ue及可读存储介质
CN118233252A (zh) * 2022-12-20 2024-06-21 华为技术有限公司 解调参考信号的传输方法及相关装置
CN118382134A (zh) * 2023-01-20 2024-07-23 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法、装置、存储介质、芯片及计算机程序产品
CN120858635A (zh) * 2023-03-09 2025-10-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 用于侧行传输的方法和终端设备
CN117939651A (zh) * 2023-04-04 2024-04-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 传输信息量的确定方法、装置、设备及存储介质
CN120345284A (zh) * 2023-05-04 2025-07-18 上海传英信息技术有限公司 处理方法、通信设备及存储介质
CN121711792A (zh) * 2024-09-20 2026-03-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 传输块大小的确定方法、装置、存储介质及程序产品

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108781454A (zh) * 2016-03-29 2018-11-09 华为技术有限公司 比特块大小确定方法及设备
WO2019073464A1 (en) * 2017-10-13 2019-04-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) DETERMINATION OF TRANSPORT BLOCK SIZE FOR NEW RADIO

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US12238701B2 (en) * 2019-03-29 2025-02-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for determining transport block size in NR V2X
US12375203B2 (en) * 2020-01-03 2025-07-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Transport block size determination for sidelink communications

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108781454A (zh) * 2016-03-29 2018-11-09 华为技术有限公司 比特块大小确定方法及设备
WO2019073464A1 (en) * 2017-10-13 2019-04-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) DETERMINATION OF TRANSPORT BLOCK SIZE FOR NEW RADIO

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CATT: "Remaining issues on physical layer structure for NR sidelink", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2000520, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200224 - 20200306, 15 February 2020 (2020-02-15), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051853344 *
See also references of EP4132171A4

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2025539245A (ja) * 2022-11-02 2025-12-04 日本電気株式会社 端末装置及び端末装置によって実行される方法
EP4613004A4 (en) * 2022-11-02 2025-12-24 Nec Corp COMMUNICATION METHODS, DEVICES AND MEDIA

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US12402104B2 (en) 2025-08-26
EP4132171A1 (en) 2023-02-08
US20230047000A1 (en) 2023-02-16
CN112714497A (zh) 2021-04-27
CN113543314A (zh) 2021-10-22
CN112714497B (zh) 2022-04-12
EP4132171A4 (en) 2023-10-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN112714497B (zh) 一种传输块尺寸确定方法及装置
CN108347778B (zh) 通信方法及装置
JP7532643B2 (ja) ロング物理サイドリンクフィードバックチャネル（ｐｓｆｃｈ）フォーマットによるｐｓｆｃｈレンジ拡張
CN102869049B (zh) 传输控制信道指示信息的方法、基站和用户设备
CN109831827B (zh) 数据传输方法、终端和基站
CN104106232B (zh) 用于发送信令以支持灵活参考信号配置的方法和设备
CN111867095B (zh) 一种通信方法与终端装置
KR20210064230A (ko) 사이드링크 채널 자원 유닛들의 구성을 위한 방법 및 장치
WO2022036529A1 (zh) 一种相位跟踪参考信号的发送方法、接收方法及通信装置
WO2014176967A1 (zh) 一种解调参考信号图样信息的选取方法、系统及装置
JP7481437B2 (ja) 復調参照信号の構成情報取得方法、構成方法、および装置
WO2018000929A1 (zh) 一种子帧配置方法及相关设备
WO2021027815A1 (zh) 一种反馈信息传输方法及装置
CN112134661A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN115567890A (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2021238504A1 (zh) 一种上行传输资源指示方法及装置
WO2022155824A1 (zh) 参考信号的传输方法和通信装置
WO2018171792A1 (zh) 一种参考信号传输方法、装置及系统
WO2021056564A1 (zh) 直连通信操作处理方法、装置及存储介质
WO2021088080A1 (zh) 一种数据的发送、接收方法、参考信号的发送方法及装置
WO2021092954A1 (zh) 一种侧行数据包的发送、接收方法和通信装置
WO2021088081A1 (zh) 一种控制信息发送方法、接收方法和通信装置
JP2024534433A (ja) 無線通信システムにおいて端末間調整と関連した情報の送受信のための方法及びその装置
WO2025139796A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2024230217A1 (zh) 一种解调参考信号传输方法、装置及存储介质

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21785577

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202237063603

Country of ref document: IN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021785577

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20221104